NORTH GARDEN AVE GARAGE - 18-0033-ENNorth Garden Ave Garage (18 -0033 -EN)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
CLEARWATER
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
AUGUST/2019
City of Clearwater, Florida
North Garden Ave Garage 18 -0033 -EN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
COVER Page II Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION 1
INVITATION TO BID
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
North Garden Parking Garage:
Parking Garage Restoration
Documents and plans for Project # 18 -0033 -EN
are available at www.mvclearwater.com/bid.
The work includes:
Concrete repair, removal and replacement of expansion
joints, installation of waterproofing membrane, removal
and replacement of sealants, restoration of handrail
systems, stucco repair, metal wall framing repair, paint
and sealing exterior facade/wall, and power washing an
existing parking structure.
Pre -Bid Conference:
[Insert Date & Time here]
[Insert location here]
Pre -qualification DEADLINE: [Insert Date]
Category: [Insert Category Type & Amount]
Bids DUE: [Insert Date here]
City of Clearwater, Project # 18 -0033 -EN
Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor
100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
Issued by: Alyce Benge CPPO, Purchasing Manager
For additional information contact Engineering Dept.:
727-562-4750
SECTION I Page 1 Updated 8/2/2018
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents
SECTION II i
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3
6. CONTRACT TIME 3
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3
9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3
10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5
13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5
15. OPENING OF BIDS 5
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7
19. BID PROTEST 7
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 8
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9
SECTION II i Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater
website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as
indicated on the DVC Marketing Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-
refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans, specifications, bond
forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form and Addendums.
1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the
Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete
sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders or others.
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application
package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater,
Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address);
100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at
(727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of
Clearwater Website at address:
www.myclearwater.com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction-
management.
Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two
weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the
City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre -
qualification status before a Bid Opening.
The Contractor shall provide copies of the current Contractor License/Registration with the
State of Florida and Pinellas County in the bid response.
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d)
study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify
Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the
site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents,
but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the
completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and
subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site
and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may
be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but
not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction.
SECTION II
Page 1 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City
and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible
conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions
appear in the General Conditions.
3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission
of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition
upon completion of such explorations and tests.
' 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract
' Documents.
3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
' Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without
exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the
Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
' construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
I
4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in
writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer
in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan
I Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding
Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda,
prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by
I formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will
be without legal effect.
4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
ICity or Engineer.
SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an
amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a
certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued
by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions.
5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the
Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid
Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and
furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council,
the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid
Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the
award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the
successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of
other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening.
5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida.
6. CONTRACT TIME
6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
' 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V.
1
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or
equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that
a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will
not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement.
The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions
and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9. SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested,
shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience
statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification
for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the
completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%)
of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after
due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other
person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City
Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase
in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such
substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder
SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and
organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for
sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other
person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make
written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed
acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the
Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization
against whom he has reasonable objection.
10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink
or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be
to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the
Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the
price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders
are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or
item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or
item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts
shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they
be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section
or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed
individual items.
10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown
below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership
shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation
or partnership.
10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner,
whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be
shown below the signature.
10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
1 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
1
11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and
number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in
another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the
City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated
in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be
accepted.
11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and
corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one
SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business
Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form.
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner
that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A
request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly
authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a
new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no
Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical
or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or
scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction
of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City.
The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid.
13. REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves
the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the
rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of
form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of
any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would
not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the
Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to
meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the
right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public.
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among
the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for
the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the
Contract Documents.
15. OPENING OF BIDS
15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for
Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in
any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and
impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax
and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and
incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the
Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description
in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions.
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect
to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or
contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a
drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established
procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a
drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor
shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the
accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace
and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees
for drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee
will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction
of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any
controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring
in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any
employee who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION Il — Instructions to Bidders
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies
in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof
will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not
the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be
requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience
of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor
for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist
in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations
to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's
satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best
interest of the City.
18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the
best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be
awarded to only one Contractor.
18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida
Statutes (2014), specifically to:
(a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required
by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service;
(b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions
that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not
exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law;
(c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and
(d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City
of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of
the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential
and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored
electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible
with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater.
19. BID PROTEST
19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST:
Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract
may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not
satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this
section.
19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE:
SECTION II Page 7 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal
shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of
the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not
have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest
prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due
dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five
(5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder,
whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon
telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific
portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted
if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of
the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award,
or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing,
stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work
days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the
appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she
may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her
reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and
the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter
of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days
of receipt of the appeal.
19.3. PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee
paid.
19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST:
In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the
solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or
until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without
delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City.
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related
to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act
(Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650
Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
SECTION II Page 8 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION 11— Instructions to Bidders
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and
implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management
programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent
the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water
quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during
the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment
control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment
control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best
Management Practices.
SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1 Table of Contents:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. DEFINITIONS 1
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT 5
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6
3.1. INTENT 6
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 9
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS
INSURANCE 10
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE10
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11
6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14
SECTION III i Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 15
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16
6.8. PERMITS 16
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 16
6.10. EMERGENCIES 17
6.11. DRAWINGS 18
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 22
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24
7. OTHER WORK 25
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25
7.2. COORDINATION 25
8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
26
9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32
SECTION III ii Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33
13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 33
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 38
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 38
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40
17. MISCELLANEOUS 41
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41
17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 41
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 41
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42
19. MATERIAL USED 42
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 42
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 43
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44
SECTION III iii Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
22.1. GENERAL 44
22.2. EXAMPLE 45
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45
23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46
23.3. FIXED SIGN 46
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 46
23.5. SIGN COLORING 46
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 46
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 46
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.47
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM AND ISRAEL
CERTIFICATION FORM 48
SECTION III iv Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
1. DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or
change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices
for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent
of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
SECTION III Page 1 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this
contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been
made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in
a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of
the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
SECTION III Page 2 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such
in the Supplementary Conditions.
F. D. O. T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications.
These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract
Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations
under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible
for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain
projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during
construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
SECTION III Page 3 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the
Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that
the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if
no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as
evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially
complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to
Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
SECTION III Page 4 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of
performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF
INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional
copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall
start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done
at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section
255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides
City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court.
SECTION III Page 5 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field
measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer,
Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the
Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color
Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including
submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete, and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a
completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal
Discharge Construction Site Training.
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and
all material test reports generated in the same time period.
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1. INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
SECTION III Page 6 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which
may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade
usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or
not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-known technical or
construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such
words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and
interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative.
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or
code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard
specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the
responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the
duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of
their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and
interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every
provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be
deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included
herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly
inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be
physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision
of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard,
specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the
Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work
affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract
Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications,
provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for
failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or
reasonably should have known thereof.
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work
is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances
or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures
or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
SECTION III Page 7 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification
of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site
or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by
Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to
accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly
notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the
site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the
Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further
investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional
investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that
the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical
conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which
could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change, or Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will
be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and
checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground
Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities
and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the
Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any
utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any
excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of
utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory.
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in
Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall
be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and
preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the
prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever
any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such
reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the
Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction
surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement
caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined
by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be
computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with
a minimum charge of one hour.
SECTION III Page 8 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida
Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and
payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in
effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of
time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also
furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in
the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties
as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable
Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570
(amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury
Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents'
authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05,
Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety
shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to
reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or
becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project
is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be
acceptable to Owner.
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub-
contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City,
sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be
obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the
right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced
or eliminated.
Specifically, the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on
an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then
coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the
termination or expiration of this Agreement:
The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess
liability policies.
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises
operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising
injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one
million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate.
SECTION III Page 9 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or
borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars)
combined single limit.
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
INSURANCE
Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of
Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred
thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each
employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with
benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary
Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where
applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and
volunteers, if any.
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR
OMISSIONS INSURANCE
Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the
type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million
dollars) per occurrence. If a claims -made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of
coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage, unless prior policy was
extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either
by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with
no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide
a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage.
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY
INSURANCE
If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under
this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance
on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care,
custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any
sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property.
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of
loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner
with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as
the project proceeds.
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS
Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s)
of the insurance policy' s renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the
Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD
SECTION III Page 10 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the
coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when
requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all
applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or
delivered is as follows:
City of Clearwater
Engineering Department
Attn: Construction Office Specialist
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project
Number.
2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal,
termination, material change or reduction in coverage.
3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for
Contractor's negligence.
4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense,
for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this
Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City
shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor
providing its defense as contemplated herein.
The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential
liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be
construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to
provide the insurance coverage specified.
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in
the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against
any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and
any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against
Sub -contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for
losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party
making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so
issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer,
Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss
due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct
physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the
completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured
SECTION 1I1 Page 11 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the
Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment.
6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method,
technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent
resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative
except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative
at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall
keep a mobile cell phone on his person, so he can be contacted whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be
removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of
the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct
themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved
holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime
slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the
end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to
the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector
overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check.
Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four
hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons
or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours.
SECTION III Page 12 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise
restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without
Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in
the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored,
may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or
materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per
Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification
or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item
or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of
other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material
or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar
so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval.
If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does
not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor
shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine
that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an
acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be
not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's
Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include
advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or
"or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
SECTION III Page 13 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction
conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list
the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization
for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative
for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and
organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work
under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors,
Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with
the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work
to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5. USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by
negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or
SECTION III Page 14 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and
hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees
and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from
any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,
Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon
Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work
or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish
and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment
and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and
storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of
construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and
restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed.
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater therefore, these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities
shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the
loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought.
• Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a
successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations,
replacement of driveways or sidewalks or another project specific milestone. It must
be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust
control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the
SECTION III Page 15 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
1
1
1
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to
patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the
existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies,
which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing
and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and
Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring
Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing
or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims,
costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be
Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in
accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's
obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02
shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E -Verify System to verify employment
eligibility.
6.8. PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection
fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of
Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner
shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment
fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be
waived.
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all
persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and
equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property
SECTION III Page 16 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,
structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or
during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and
shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury
from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced
at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention
program which shall include but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of
programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention
of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his
employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention
program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases
of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal
protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's
employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or
risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall
remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all
persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their
safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians
and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall
notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any
of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor.
Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10. EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall
give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work
or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change
Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
SECTION III Page 17 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11. DRAWINGS
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL
REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to
Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor
shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information
with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling,
storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all
information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other
Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each
submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and
technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor
has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's
review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer
specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may
have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written
communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be
made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each
such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall
receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal
within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for
information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at
each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14)
consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for
a delay claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop
Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct
specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on
previous submittals.
SECTION III Page 18 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will
any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the
requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number
greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved
initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all
third submittals. The number of first-time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals
agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal
of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor
at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due
Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously
approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be
backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of
Contractor.
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including
revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction
process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile,
of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the
Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed
during the construction period.
The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not
conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings.
SECTION III Page 19 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11.2.1. General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or
vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also
known as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner
with the required As -Built Survey.
6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest
downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations,
manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the
plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all
pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on
the profile if one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans.
Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also, all new and
replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above.
Additionally, there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type
construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring
The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
SECTION III Page 20 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or
if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90
(horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be
the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must
be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6. Standards
The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7. Other
The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1. Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1.
Prefixes and Suffixes
DI
prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP
prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX
prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR
prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU
prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX
suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2.
Laver Naming Definitions:
GAS
gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC
power lines and appurtenances
PHONE
telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE
cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC
curbs
WALK
sidewalk
WATER
water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM
storm lines and appurtenances
TREES
trees, bushes, planters
SECTION III
Page 21 of 49
Updated 9/24/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
SANITARY
sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE
all fences
BLDG
buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE
driveways
EOP
edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC
signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK
top of bank
TOESLOPE
toe of slope
TOPBERM
top of berm
TOEBERM
toe of berm
SEAWALL
seawall
CONCSLAB
concrete slabs
WALL
walls, except seawall
SHORE
shoreline, water elevation
CL
centerline of road
CLD
centerline of ditch
CLS
centerline of swale
CORNER
property corners, monumentation
BENCH
benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2. Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3. Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height
of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES
The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless
approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all
drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files.
SECTION III Page 22 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com.
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND
GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty
and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or
operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of
the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he
shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the
elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the
Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or
damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final
acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his
own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a
period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative,
(ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance
of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any
acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION
To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City,
its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands,
claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys',
witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, or
resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any
negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii)
Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established
by this Agreement.
SECTION III Page 23 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
1
1
1
1t
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III —General Conditions
Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any
issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this
indemnification.
The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor
or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided
supplies or services.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall
not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any
limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not
intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may
have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties.
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS
The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014),
specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public
agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in
Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise
provided by law.
c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the
duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor
does not transfer the records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public
records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by
the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to
the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public
records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure
requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of
the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public
records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon
request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is
compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency.
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for
services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not
possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor
of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow
the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time.
SECTION III Page 24 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply
with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract
provisions in accordance with the contract.
g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a
reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records
relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award
against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney
fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with
the public records request within a reasonable time; and
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written
notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not
complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of
public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with
the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or
certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery,
which may be in an electronic format.
j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the
notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
7. OTHER WORK
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform
work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the
project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is
denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the
Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2. COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
SECTION III Page 25 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner' s responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the
Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties,
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are
set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner
and Engineer.
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the
requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal
responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which
shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other
clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's
Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and
Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the
amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the
Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the
Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed
SECTION III Page 26 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders,
see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with
Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to
Contractor and Completion.
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be
delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving
rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other
party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days
of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise
by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other
matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
SECTION III Page 27 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other
provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good
faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise
or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose
or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of
them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible
for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative
will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by
the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions
or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work
involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work
Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as
amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case
of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for
Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
SECTION III Page 28 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
• changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of
acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or
correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or
(iii) agreed to by the parties;
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any
written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions
on Disputes;
• provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from
any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and
applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on
the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing
the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or
undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price.
The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the
general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to
Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the
occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting
data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless
Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the
claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted
in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work
involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such
unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may
include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the
Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed
changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for
SECTION III Page 29 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
' compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items
of direct costs required for the directed work.
' The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
' established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
' 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs
if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental
rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the
' full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and
shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated
with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be
paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost
combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated
operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment
' on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by
the Contractor or Subcontractor.
I A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
1 B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
I The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
' 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE
ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's
costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other
' expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the
allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
' Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
SECTION III Page 30 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids
and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional
expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price
contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the
construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and
completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change
order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction
of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable
deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data
in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the
adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled
as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or
Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements
of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may
be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as
provided in the article for Changes in the
SECTION III Page 31 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be
Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within
the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited
to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or
other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work.
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL
OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work
for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing
personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for
Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or
of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner' s Representative
has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
SECTION III Page 32 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or
resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required
by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is
found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with
the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the
SECTION III Page 33 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily
correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom.
If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency
where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work
corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically, and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change
of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for
final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner.
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor
fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven
days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights
and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such
corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take
possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's
Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to
exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages
incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against
Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
SECTION III Page 34 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease
in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims,
costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's
defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones)
because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of
the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein.
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review
an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once
each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's
Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will
only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor
and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for
Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement,
completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the
Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of
the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official
Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as -
built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report
is provided.
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no
later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall
be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional
sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants
that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens,
claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims
growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics,
materialmen, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all
SECTION III Page 35 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the
Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of nature hereinabove
designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner
may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the
Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money
deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is
furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be
resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this
sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety.
In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor
and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract
by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment
made in good faith.
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review
and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be
paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected,
notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing
payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying
deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case,
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's
Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner.
Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any
such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner
Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is
defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the
Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required
to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual
knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work
and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in
accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or
Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount
so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor
corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
SECTION III Page 36 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with
Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part
of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete.
If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to
Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete
and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part
of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in
writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner,
Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the
Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to
be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in
writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially
complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will
apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the
division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and
will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection
reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final
punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this
work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any
corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all
the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take
such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously
delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited
to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed
SECTION III Page 37 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract
Documents.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating
the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or
corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished
as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment
of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted
by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment
shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative
is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his
recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon,
Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is
acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner' s Representative will return
the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount
recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those
previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
SECTION III Page 38 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so
fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to
perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure
to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the
progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract
or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the
Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein
specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that
the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or
any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to
the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be
used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the
Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor
but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such
case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If
the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained
by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to
Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's
Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or
remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the
Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter
accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release
Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
SECTION III Page 39 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic
loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not
be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an
Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for
thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon
seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until
payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to
preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change
of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping
Work as permitted by this article.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise
have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided,
however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration.
SECTION III Page 40 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
17. MISCELLANEOUS
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be
determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2. GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the
notice.
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents
or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other
party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of
this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any
applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to
notice of assignment.
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to three (3)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in
the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and
the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department.
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers
and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact William
SECTION 111 Page 41 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Buzzell, at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4929 or email:
William.Buzzell@myClearwater.com.
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
19. MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical
Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an
inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by
addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in
accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation.
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP)
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS
The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the
Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner
is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other
applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's
Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered
on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the
materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the
actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For
purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects' fees, and any other amounts
that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used.
Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value
and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an
ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as
ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix).
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK
Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification
of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or
SECTION III Page 42 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent
to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's
possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or
equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or
delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor.
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or
equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities,
verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining
all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance
of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor
delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally
required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor
shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The
Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever
nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor.
As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect
all shipments from the suppliers and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The
Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by
documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This
documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to
the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to
the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials.
Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor.
The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and
determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are
patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or
equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers
defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the
Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the
Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming
condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue
delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise
incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or
equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an
inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from
Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated
damages.
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION
The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into
Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor
shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the
SECTION III Page 43 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been
incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for
all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair,
maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the
appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor.
The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and
penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases
made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final
determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject
to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not
subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed
assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials
or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor
Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the
ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be
paid for by the Contractor.
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF
CONSTRUCTION
22.1. GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction;
general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption
and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name,
Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for
residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the
proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample
door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of
construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be
a minimum of 4-'/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences
and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to
the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all
Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access
routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice
period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries
during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive
citizen inquires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
SECTION III Page 44 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
22.2.
EXAMPLE
SECTION III — General Conditions
CLEARWATER
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not
be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner
wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-
of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any
particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work.
Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be
SECTION III
Page 45 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV,
SCOPE OF WORK.
23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3. FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood
of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of
two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as
necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground.
Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or
attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted
white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached
to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 -inches or
thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable
sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade.
23.5. SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering
shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign
itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall
provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor.
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project
site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian
or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will
be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs
will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work
on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations
at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place
until the request for final payment.
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SECTION III Page 46 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III —General Conditions
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
6'
<PROJECT NAME>
<CONTRACT NUMBER>
<DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT
N CONTRACTOR:
1 COMPLETION DATE:
FUNDING:
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE•
1
L
t
E
E
C
E
N
CLE A RWATE R
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article
2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to
commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work
within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day,
for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays,
Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on
Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of
the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of
SECTION III Page 47 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8)
day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS
OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION
FORM AND ISRAEL CERTIFICATION FORM
Pursuant to Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, any vendor, company, individual, principal,
subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in
business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for,
or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount
equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Any vendor, company, individual,
principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or
is engaged in a boycott of Israel, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or
enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for ANY amount.
Each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of
Clearwater that it is not on the aforementioned lists, or engaged in business operations in Cuba or
Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in
accordance with Section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes
specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria,
including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing,
leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real
property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. Boycott Israel or
boycott of Israel means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking other actions to
limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or in Israeli -
controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is participating
in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott of Israel
or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as
evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel.
The certification forms (the Certification) are attached hereto, and must be submitted, along with
all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure
to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of
Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities
in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel, then the contract
may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false
certification, the City of Clearwater, on a case-by-case basis and in its sole discretion, may allow
a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract for goods or services,
if the conditions set forth in Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, apply.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as
provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification forms.
SECTION III Page 48 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION III — General Conditions
See Section V of the Contract for Certification Forms to be executed and submitted with the
Bid/Proposal Form.
SECTION III Page 49 of 49 Updated 9/24/2018
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Content:
100 SERIES: GENERAL 1
101. SCOPE OF WORK 1
102. FIELD ENGINEERING 1
102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 1
102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 2
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 2
103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 2
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 3
105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 3
105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3
105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3
105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 3
105-4. EQUIPMENT 3
105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 3
105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 4
105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 4
105-8. LIGHTING 4
105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 4
105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 4
105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE 5
105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 5
106. STREET SIGNS 5
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5
107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5
107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 5
107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 6
107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7
107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 7
107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 7
107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 8
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 8
108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 8
108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 8
109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 9
109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 9
109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 9
109-3. THE "BRIGHT & BEAUTIFUL" LOGO AND ITS USE 9
SECTION IV i Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 10
109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 10
109-6. POSTING 10
109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 10
200 SERIES: SITEWORK 11
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 11
202. OBSTRUCTIONS 12
203. DEWATERING 12
203-1. GENERAL 12
203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 13
204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 13
204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 13
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 13
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 14
206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 14
206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 14
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 14
207-1. GENERAL 14
207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 14
207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 15
207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 15
207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 15
207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 15
207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 15
207-8. MAINTENANCE 15
207-9. COMPLIANCE 16
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH
EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 16
208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 16
208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 16
208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 16
208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 16
208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 17
208-6. RIP -RAP 17
208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 17
300 SERIES: MATERIALS 18
301. CONCRETE 18
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 18
302-1. EXCAVATION 18
302-2. FORMS 18
303. REINFORCEMENT 18
SECTION IV ii Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 19
304. BACKFILL 19
304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 19
304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 19
305. RIPRAP 20
305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 20
305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 21
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 22
401. SANITARY MANHOLES 22
401-1. BUILT UP TYPE 22
401-2. PRECAST TYPE 22
401-3. DROP MANHOLES 23
401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS 23
401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS 23
401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 23
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 23
402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 23
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 24
403-1. MATERIALS 24
403-2. INSTALLATION 24
403-3. TESTING 25
403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 26
404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26
404-1. INTENT 26
404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 26
404-3. MATERIALS 26
404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION 27
404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 28
404-6. LINER INSTALLATION 29
404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 29
404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 29
404-9. PAYMENT 29
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 30
405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT 30
405-2. PAYMENT 30
405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 30
405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 31
405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 32
405-6. GROUTING MIX 32
405-7. LINER MIX 32
405-8. WATER 33
405-9. OTHER MATERIALS 33
405-10. EQUIPMENT 33
405-11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 34
SECTION IV iii Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 35
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE
LINES AND APPURTENANCES 41
501. SCOPE 41
502. MATERIALS 41
502-1. GENERAL 41
502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41
502-3. GATE VALVES 43
502-4. VALVE BOXES 44
502-5. HYDRANTS 44
502-6. SERVICE SADDLES 45
502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 45
502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 46
502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES 46
502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 46
503. CONSTRUCTION 46
503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 46
503-2. PIPE LAYING 47
503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 48
503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 49
504. TESTS 49
504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 49
504-2. NOTICE OF TEST 50
505. STERILIZATION 50
505-1. STERILIZING AGENT 50
505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 50
505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 50
505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 50
505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS 50
506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 51
506-1. GENERAL 51
506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 51
506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 52
506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS 52
506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 52
600 SERIES: STORMWATER 53
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 53
601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 53
602. UNDERDRAINS 53
602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 53
602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 54
SECTION IV iv Updated 10/12/2018
I
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
603. STORM SEWERS 54
603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 54
I603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 55
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES 55
I
604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 55
604-2. PRECAST TYPE 56
I 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 56
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 56
605-1. MATERIAL 56
I605-2. PERFORMANCE 57
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 59
I 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS,
SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 59
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 59
I
702-1. BASE 59
702-2. SUBGRADE 61
I
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 62
703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 62
703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
I
703-3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 62
ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 63
703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 63
I
703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 63
703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 63
703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 64
703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 64
703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 65
703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 65
I
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 65
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 66
I
705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66
705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66
706. CONCRETE CURBS 66
I
706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66
706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 67
707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 67
707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 67
707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 67
I707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67
707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67
I
708. MILLING OPERATIONS 68
ISECTION IV v Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 68
708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 68
708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 69
708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 69
708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 69
708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 69
708-7. TYPES OF MILLING 69
708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 69
708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 70
708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 70
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 71
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 71
801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 71
802. SIGNING AND MARKING 71
802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 72
803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 73
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 73
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 73
902-1. IRRIGATION 73
902-2. LANDSCAPE 83
903. SODDING 97
904. SEEDING 98
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 98
905-1. SCOPE 98
905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 99
905-3. WORK METHODS 99
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 101
907. COMPLETION OF WORK 101
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 101
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 102
910. TREE PROTECTION 102
910-1. TREE BARRICADES 102
910-2. ROOT PRUNING 103
910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 104
SECTION IV vi Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
100 SERIES: GENERAL
101. SCOPE OF WORK
Project Name: North Garden Ave Garage
Project Number: 18 -0033 -EN
Scope of Work:
Concrete repair, removal and replacement of expansion joints, installation of waterproofing
membrane, removal and replacement of sealants, restoration of handrail systems, stucco repair,
metal wall framing repair, paint and sealing exterior facade/wall, and power washing an existing
parking structure
The Contractor shall provide copies of a current Contractor License/Registration with the state of
Florida and Pinellas County in the bid response.
The Contractor shall provide Fixed or Portable project signs as described in SECTION III,
ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at
the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval.
Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's
schedule of work.
Contract Period: 365 Consecutive Calendar Days
102. FIELD ENGINEERING
102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service
required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to
locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the
construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required
to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed
professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3)
complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in
Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
102-1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall
preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent
SECTION IV Page 1 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of
construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land
Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida.
102-1.2. LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be
responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes
used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer,
will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is
$100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer
prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2
of these Contract Documents.
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article
1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the
estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of
calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any
responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities
nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of
quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining
thereto.
103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local
or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted
and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is
referenced for the same task.
Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not
covered by City's Standards and Specifications.
SECTION IV Page 2 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged
in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway
or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used,
and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the
Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO
RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements,
rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of
pre -construction conditions.
105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video
recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation.
105-4. EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate
colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio
portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper
volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video
coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage
shall be obtained by walking.
105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording,
exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer
orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description
SECTION IV
Page 3 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall
also be free from any conversations.
105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date
and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed
periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number,
direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme
upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be
sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In
addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video
level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted
to maximize picture quality.
105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly
visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the
proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances
for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not
exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during
the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
105-8. LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those
subjects.
105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to
the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence.
The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not
exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and
project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various
segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of
easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers,
engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date.
SECTION IV Page 4 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE
Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes,
landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the
area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or
defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at
any one time.
105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
106. STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty-four (24)
hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE
TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic
control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard
warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits
issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project,
incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic
Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management
Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department
of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most
recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel
regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans.
SECTION IV Page 5 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the
driver proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision:
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic
control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours
shall be provided by appropriate signs."
Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision
FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans.
107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local
streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer.
107-3.1. ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
107-3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
SECTION IV Page 6 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
107-3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL
COLLECTORS
' Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
' 107-3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
' Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and
potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
' 107-3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
107-3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
1 C -View Release
107-3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS
' 107-3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
' News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days.
107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
' specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
(727) 562-4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control
' plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control
devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make
known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction
costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise.
' SECTION IV Page 7 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety
Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation.
This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these
Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor
will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and
shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic
control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed
to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor
shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or
to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be
grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated
Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary
suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to
be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the
following options:
Option 1 - Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded.
Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages
up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the
following table.
108-2.
REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
VOLTAGE
(nominal, kV, alternating current)
MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
(feet)
Up to 50
10
Over 50 to 200
15
SECTION IV
Page 8 of 105
Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Over 200 to 350
20
Over 350 to 500
25
Over 500 to 750
35
Over 750 to 1,000
45
Over 1,000
(as established by the utility owner/operator
or registered professional engineer who is a
qualified person with respect to electric
power transmission and distribution)
Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200
means up to and including 200kV.
109. PROJECT WEB PAGES
109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current
City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information
as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall
consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project
Web Pages.
109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508
guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT 19990505/
http://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable -width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images,
CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
109-3. THE "BRIGHT & BEAUTIFUL" LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's "Bright & Beautiful" logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and
electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising,
vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the
proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise
distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments and is not to be used by
outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public
Communications.
SECTION IV Page 9 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should
be posted to the Project Web Pages.
109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent
back to the City regarding the Project.
109-6. POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
SECTION IV Page 10 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
200 SERIES: SITEWORK
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining
the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The
Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of
all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these
plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency
safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other
similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the
OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these
OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation
if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not
conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide
the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's
work at the Contractor's expense.
The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor
is required to use excavation and trench -shoring methods in compliance with all safety
requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to
complete the project.
Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified.
For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side
than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be
laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow
the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
SECTION IV
Page 11 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
202. OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any
survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before
removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a
registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed
to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved
means.
203. DEWATERING
203-1. GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry".
The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work,
using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation
and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and
reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the
pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the
surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required
to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where
possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must
be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case
of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
203-2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE
The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit
for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance
with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced
groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It
shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and
disposal methods. The City will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction.
SECTION IV
Page 12 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes,
structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the
Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of
the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by
either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of
Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the
removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material.
204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools,
labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of
the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross
diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service
connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED
Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW
Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE
Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE
Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water
SAFETY GREEN
Sewer Systems
LAVENDER
Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines
SECTION IV
Page 13 of 105
Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
WHITE
Proposed Excavation
PINK
Temporary Survey Markings
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be six inch (6") x three inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road
and vertical curb shall be four inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face.
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take
ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State
and Federal Requirements.
206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
207-1. GENERAL
Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor
shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion
and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater
Standard Indices.
207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida
Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel
working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor
shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of training and
SECTION IV
Page 14 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre -Construction
Meeting.
207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches
such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within
sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion
of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original
site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL
STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no
case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and
Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater
Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation.
207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with
the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and,
wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the
uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream,
channel, road ditch or waterway.
207-8. MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
SECTION IV
Page 15 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
207-9. COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent
enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND
OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES.
Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of
the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion
control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are
necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part
of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed
and maintained in a safe condition at all times.
208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS
Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with
a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high
water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a
vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and
maintains the established shoreline.
208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION
The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed
4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the
adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required
to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet
N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and
replaced to their current height.
208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD
OF THE CCL
Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by
regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal
construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department
of environmental protection.
208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL
The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the
following conditions:
(a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design.
(b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the
original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location.
SECTION IV
Page 16 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
(c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb.
(d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the
seawall behind the new seawall is removed.
(e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed.
(f) The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line.
(g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the
property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive,
and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier
construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the
original seawall slab.
208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post -
construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not
alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement.
208-6. RIP -RAP
On all -natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired
seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave
energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide
habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls
and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than
50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel.
208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL
A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities,
including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all
portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line.
SECTION IV
Page 17 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
300 SERIES: MATERIALS
301. CONCRETE
The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty-four (24)
hours in advance of all concrete placement.
Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to:
All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and
Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete
Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have
fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at twenty-eight (28)
days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall
conform to ASTM C-33. All ready -mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all
concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or
special placement considerations are required.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion.
Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards
(5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28
days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to
provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need
for removal, and compensation or denial thereof.
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
302-1. EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point
six inches (6") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed.
302-2. FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal
only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission
from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions
required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength
when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing.
303. REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall
SECTION IV
Page 18 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77
requirements.
303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
304. BACKFILL
304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL
Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the
excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall
be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard
fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar
material.
Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145.
Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall
be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro -hammer
shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the
sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12") above the
pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable
fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications.
Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be
effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's
specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to
make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D
filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or
ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends.
Where new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified
twenty-eight (28) days compressive strength occurs.
Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and
compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet
(4') above the top of the pipe or culvert.
The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra
dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or
lump sum price for the item of the work specified.
304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved
by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by
SECTION IV Page 19 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The
Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re -inspection services.
Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be
compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or
ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation.
Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of
95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D-698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be
performed up to the proposed finished grade.
Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by
performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch
(8") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density
testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using
nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume
method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556)
or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction
effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the
location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all
equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing.
Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill
or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures
whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's
Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four
(4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8") lift.
Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that
insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the
limits of the unacceptable backfill.
Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable
backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to
determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's
Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional
locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional
testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate
limits of unacceptable backfill.
305. RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans.
The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons.
SECTION IV
Page 20 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing
and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No
payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
SECTION IV Page 21 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER
401. SANITARY MANHOLES
401-1. BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings.
Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of
adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a
radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly.
Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete
manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer
pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches (24").
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches
(24").
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled, and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of
mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher
course.
401-2. PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five
inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall
be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being
sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system
shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
SECTION IV Page 22 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches
(5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete —
Adjustment of Manholes.
401-3. DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with
or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301.
401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal.
The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams
Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or
PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm).
401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seale or approved water stop coupling.
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER
STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by
the Engineer.
402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
SECTION IV Page 23 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
' 403-1. MATERIALS
403-1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35.
1 Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length
1 of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20').
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings
for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main
except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall
be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical
Specifications Article 501. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property
line.
403-1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
1
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for
water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with
manufacturer' s recommendations.
1 All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation
shall be rejected.
403-2. INSTALLATION
403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended
practices contained in ASTM D 2321.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing
working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable
sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb
compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
tDewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation
of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water.
1
1 SECTION IV Page 24 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or
misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter
aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
403-3. TESTING
403-3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may
be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above
groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head
of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water
table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall
the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or
exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the
Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by
uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by
the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found
to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains
to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance.
Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be
cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or
all sections of the line.
403-3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi for two (2) hours, as described
in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
SECTION IV Page 25 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT
403-4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment
shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill
and grading.
403-4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these
Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
404-1. INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8") to
twelve inch (12") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless,
continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER
ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor
prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and
form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer.
404-3. MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from
the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have
SECTION IV Page 26 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property
values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material
Property
ASTM Method
Value
HDPE
HDPE
Tensile Strength
D 638
3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus
E=113,000 psi
Impact Strength
D 256 A
3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus
E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff.
c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance
with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous
throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults.
The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from
the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may
at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above
requirements.
Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior
to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or liner system approval must be
received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids.
404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer
from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control
the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's
treatment plants.
SECTION IV
Page 27 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed,
all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as
specified below.
404-5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION
This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum
requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently
using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV
Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor -
provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct
synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database.
404-5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND
REQUIREMENTS
The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats
to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and/or external hard
drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers.
404-5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS
Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4
format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data
linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to
the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video
record in real-time.
The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES
standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program
(Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo-
database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer
Nodes.
The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or
storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related
attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing
data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single
database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data
gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore,
all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects.
404-5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION
The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The
synch process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to
SECTION IV Page 28 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into
a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation.
404-6. LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users
when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers
with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup
occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property
damage costs and claims.
404-9. PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of
manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
SECTION IV Page 29 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these
specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids
and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will
submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be
met.
405-2. PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed
liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment
will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal;
Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill;
Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe
extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and
grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work
as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay
item, per linear foot of liner.
405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
405-3.1. MATERIALS
405-3.1.1. LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753.
405-3.1.2. MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3)
parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
405-3.1.3. GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
SECTION IV Page 30 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal
of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside
of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible.
Pour six inches (6") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure
an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal
the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout.
Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway
Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces".
405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the
Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious
liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
SECTION IV Page 31 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two
(2) coat application.
405-4.1. MATERIALS
405-4.1.1. PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and
shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +1- 5 pcf
405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
405-6. GROUTING MIX
Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum
twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi.
405-7. LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces
and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight
shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic
foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one -
SECTION IV
Page 32 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
half inch (1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products
shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to
the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds
per cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to
108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one-half inch (1/2") in
length nor greater than five-eighths inch (5/8") in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any
heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat
rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be
spray applied to assure a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush
finishing to a relatively smooth finish.
405-8. WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
405-9. OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
405-10. EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the
hydraulic system and air compressor.
SECTION IV Page 33 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-11.1. PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and
to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large
voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
405-11.2. MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the
Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all
materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare
another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without
interruption until each application is complete.
405-11.3. SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks,
crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The
light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the
first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be
fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application
made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks.
Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty-four (24) hours
have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed, and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the
edge of the invert being no less than one-half inch (1/2"). The wall bench intersection shall be
rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall
have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
SECTION IV Page 34 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405-11.4. PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes may be prepared each
day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the
Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C
109.
405-11.5. CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
405-11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed, and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum
to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds
for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60"), and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER
PRODUCT SYSTEM
405-12.1. SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration.
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam -injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel -injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one-half inch (1/2")
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils
SECTION IV Page 35 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-12.2. MATERIALS
405-12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have
the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
405-12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and
voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of
manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412
Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Toxicity Non Toxic
405-12.2.3. WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
SECTION IV Page 36 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties
are as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.1 x1O"-1 ° cm/sec to
7.6x10"11 cm/sec
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
405-12.2.4. CEMENT LINING
A self -bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement
12 Hrs
24 Hrs
7 Days
28 Days
Astm C 495
Compressive Strength, Psi
7000
11000
12000
13000
Astm C 293
Flexural Strength, Psi
1000
1500
1800
2000
Astm C 596
Shrinkage At 90% Humidity
--
<0.04
<0.06
<0.08
Astm C 666
Freeze Thaw Aft 300 Cycle
No Damage
Astro C 990
Pull - Out Strength
200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457
Air Void Content (7 Days)
3%
Astm C 497
Porosity/Adsorption Test
4 - 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty-four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees
Fahrenheit.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2"), but no greater than two inches (2").
It will have a dark grey color.
405-12.2.5. EPDXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils.
This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface,
including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids,
can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes.
Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
SECTION IV Page 37 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
111
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Pot Life, hrs 1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
405-12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet
1 Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%),
Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil,
Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
405-12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
1 405-12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
1 a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
1 c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d. Remove debris from work area.
1 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required
by client.)
1 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
1 needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
' 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step
7) to cement lining.
405-12.3.2. PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs
shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any
loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines
and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens.
1
SECTION IV Page 38 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks
and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization.
405-12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill five-eighths inch (5/8") holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
405-12.3.5. WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
405-12.3.6. CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2") (and no more than two
inches (2")) has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a twenty-four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
405-12.3.7. EPDXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six
(6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
SECTION IV Page 39 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
1 405-12.3.8. CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
405-12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
' Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed, and the seal inflated in accordance with the
' manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum
to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds
for a forty eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety
(90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test,
necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests
shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
405-12.3.10. WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION IV Page 40 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER
MAINS, FIRE LINES AND
APPURTENANCES
501. SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
502. MATERIALS
502-1. GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size
Class
Thickness
(In.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4"
51
0.26
350
6"
50
0.25
350
8"
50
0.27
350
12"
50
0.31
350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision.
SECTION IV
Page 41 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the
main to the backflow preventer.
1 502-2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4") through eight inch (8") shall be in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible
for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size
Dimension Ratio
(OD/Thick.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
Laying Length
(Ft)
4
18
150
20
6
18
150
20
8
18
150
20
Pipe larger than eight inch (8") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require
the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4") through eight inch (8") when needed due to laying
conditions or usage.
The bell of four inch (4") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid
cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G.
solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18")
between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2") PVC
pipe to twelve inches (12") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2") PVC
pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be
plugged with a two inch (2") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous
with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is
to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
502-2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from four inch (4") through sixteen inch (16") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in
accordance with ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets
shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure
rating shall be 350 psi. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with
requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSUAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
SECTION IV Page 42 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA)
manufacture will be acceptable.
502-2.4. RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical
restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be
restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants
shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors.
502-2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by
the Engineer.
502-3. GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4") and larger, buried in earth
shall be equipped with two inch (2") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall
be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening
for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than
150 psi cold water, non -shock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so
supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch (2") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch (3") diameter are not allowed.
Gate Valves, four inch (4") to sixteen inch (16") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate
valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard
Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure,
all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion
resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 -ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside
and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.
Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA.
These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening
unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped
SECTION IV Page 43 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers
and valved by-pass.
502-4. VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron.
No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three-piece
valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided
where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be
included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for
potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed
water valve boxes and pad detail.
502-5. HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B -84-B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an 0 -ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections
with the break flange located approximately two inches (2") above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts are not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1-1/2") pentagon nut.
SECTION IV Page 44 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0 -ring seals or
threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 -
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5-1/4") valve opening, and shall be a left
hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2-1/2") hose nozzles and one (1) four
and one half inch (4-1/2") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National
Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications.
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the
hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement
of the hydrant.
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be
shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
502-6. SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4") P.V.C. water main. The largest
service connection allowable on four inch (4") main shall be one and one half inch (1-1/2").
Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2") service connections to six inch (6") and larger
mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron
with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps.
502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and
no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory
material shall be used.
SECTION IV Page 45 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed
within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed
by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service
connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently
acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end
of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum
of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three-quarter inch (3/4") bronze test plug.
502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
503. CONSTRUCTION
503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with
hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such
materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe
already on the ground.
SECTION IV Page 46 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or
near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
503-2. PIPE LAYING
503-2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30") and a maximum
of forty-two inches (42") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid
conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during
the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required,
the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and
grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction
of the obstructions.
503-2.2. INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by
the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and
hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or
other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective
coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall
be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or
fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or
rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe,
and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and
dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being
placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without
getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench,
a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the
SECTION IV Page 47 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing
or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight
plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end
at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10%) or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSUAWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
503-3.1. GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
503-3.2. VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless
shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed
eighteen inches (18") from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement
or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5
for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for
reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
503-3.3. HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten
feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 4 of 4 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall
SECTION IV Page 48 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6") ductile iron branch controlled by
an independent six inch (6") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the
main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant
assembly cost.
503-3.4. ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on
the plans.
503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and
the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made
in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual
conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized, and pipe will be properly swabbed before
connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the
supervision of the City of Clearwater.
504. TESTS
504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AW WA C600 latest revision. All
mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all
necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at
their expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
SECTION IV Page 49 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION W —Technical Specifications
504-2. NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty-eight (48) hours
advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
505. STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
505-1. STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal
Specification O -S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not
available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more
than twenty-four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be
in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
SECTION IV Page 50 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples
shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The
City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of
Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation.
506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
506-1. GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment
for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for
the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all
labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made
for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of
work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joint materials
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
506-2.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
506-2.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation.
SECTION IV Page 51 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
1 506-3.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings
' satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the
body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the
tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight
will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
506-3.2. PAYMENT
1 Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
1 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE
WITH BOXES AND COVERS
506-4.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
506-4.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
' 506-5.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed.
The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in
Article 501-2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions.
I 506-5.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust
Ianchorage, six inch (6") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on
the hydrant lead.
1
1
1
SECTION IV Page 52 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
600 SERIES: STORMWATER
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES
Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by
the Engineer.
601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
602. UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and
detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be
embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface
covered with a non -degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of
#6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter,
polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth
Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in
conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in
FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting
and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to
ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be
the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal)
per the construction detail drawings.
Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section
901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and
screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel.
602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted.
SECTION IV Page 53 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall
include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically
underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and
sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
603. STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless
otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT
Standard Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before
laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to
be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply
wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts
coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions.
The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage
pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed
stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the
pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video
shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded
as audio on the DVD. The data should include:
1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths.
2) The drainage structure number and pipe size.
3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2).
4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and
infiltration.
The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously.
All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in
accordance with Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe
discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair
or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration.
SECTION IV
Page 54 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of
concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color).
All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by
the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage
structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe
that are repaired, re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction
video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re -inspection shall
be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved.
603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured
along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes
or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required
to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for
stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.).
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR
OTHER STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until
acceptance of the work.
604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on
Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made
gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2") of
mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
SECTION IV Page 55 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
i
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
604-2. PRECAST TYPE
Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a
pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
' junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will
not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in
accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option.
' Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside,
the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure
' be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole
ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be
provided.
604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
' 605-1. MATERIAL
605-1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
605-1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS
' Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction
and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns
developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of
1 0.106 inches.
605-1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less
than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious
' effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material
difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from
acids and resistant to abrasion.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated
wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches
by 4 1/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating)
shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core,
0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core
' plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength
(75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and
having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of
alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener
SECTION IV Page 56 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining
in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to
6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge
wires.
605-1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started.
Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier
for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of
2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The
individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material.
605-1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985.
605-2. PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the
sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets
of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit
construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of
these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and
flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the
gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided
by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary
diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this
juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to
resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand
in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced
edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions
shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
SECTION IV Page 57 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and
one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two
third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut
the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement.
Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled
so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations
or five days, whichever is less.
In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to
placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses.
SECTION IV
Page 58 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced
with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as
determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All
replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8") compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus two inches (2"), if over six inches (6"), and compacted to 98% of maximum
density per AASHTO T-180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square
yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall
include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on
a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall
be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary
restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick
- per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be
reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor
shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all driveway,
curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
702-1. BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on
the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted
minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted
on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing
laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an
independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is
SECTION IV Page 59 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the
City's Technical Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base
that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's
satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until
the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in
the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance
of all base and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown
on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be
included in the bid item price for base.
2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and
911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as
shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost
of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with
Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT
approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm
that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR
shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the
Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless
requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat
shall be included in the bid item price for base.
4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall
be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope
and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or
base.
5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be
constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall
have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283,
RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders,
shared use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation,
placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included
in the bid item price for asphalt or base.
SECTION IV Page 60 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
702-1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED
BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (112"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
702-1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
702-2. SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a
minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT' s
Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade,
Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will
apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted
construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing
any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of
this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from
an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed
for the stabilized subgrade.
702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and
accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be
per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per
Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values
shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in
writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such
deficient areas that are left in place.
702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction,
finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals
necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item
for base.
SECTION IV Page 61 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on
roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
703-1.1. AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703-1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials
shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless
otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform
to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at
the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests
and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to
determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed.
The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is
discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet
the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and
investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work
shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of I/4" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or
when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition,
for excesses of one-quarter inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess
area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can
remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance
of the placement of all asphalt.
SECTION IV Page 62 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall
conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt
mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation.
Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic
concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER
THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Type SP/Spec 334-1
Type FC/Spec 337-8
Type B/Spec 234-8
ATPB/287-8
703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be
in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
703-6.1. CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the
following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703-6.2. POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
SECTION IV Page 63 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser
shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section
shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting,
prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the
manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly
cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable.
The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic
concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall
occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways,
the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and
final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will
be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the
asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and
coordinate their adjustments, so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving.
703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid
item for asphalt.
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all
construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or
mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped
SECTION IV Page 64 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall
sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the
job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall
also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling
and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted
in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the
project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch
(1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101.
703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or
prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of
cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary
to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications.
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall
be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT' s internet site.
The address is: http://www.dot.state.fl.us/construction/fuel&bit/fuel&bit.shtm. For
additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414-4252.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used
for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will
be used for payment calculation.
SECTION IV Page 65 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for
any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for
access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as
specified for the street paving.
When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material.
Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways.
705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted.
705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which
price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
706. CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed
100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all
the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify
the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all
concrete curbs.
706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted.
706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
SECTION IV Page 66 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified,
all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have
a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness
of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for
all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to
upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not
properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet,
and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted
subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical
Specifications shall also apply.
707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches
(6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303
of these Technical Specifications shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance
of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS
The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans
and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb
ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and
Specifications.
707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk,
six inch (6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted.
707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be
full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required,
labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
SECTION IV
Page 67 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
708. MILLING OPERATIONS
708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed
in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify
the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of
all milling.
708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled,
unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the
vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must
be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the
Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the
roadways before leaving the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the
prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's
expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired
base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
SECTION IV Page 68 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall
remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be
performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to
schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work.
708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all
regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND
UTILITIES
All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by
their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the
Owner/City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow
utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours' notice per State Statute).
All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703-7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
708-7. TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement
to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain
unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the
existing swale.
SECTION IV Page 69 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius
returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion,
removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 70 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND
MARKINGS
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603
through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal
and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service
assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian
detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing
traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast
Arm Assembly standard and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the
State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed
and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall
be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the
City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's
Traffic Engineering Division.
All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781.
801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete
the work per the plans.
802. SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment
will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be
corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
SECTION IV Page 71 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT
indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with
thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified.
802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
SECTION IV Page 72 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within
a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a
delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents
or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation
Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at
the pre -construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
902-1. IRRIGATION
902-1.1. DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground
irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment,
services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground
sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work
noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the
Engineer.
902-1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable
building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply.
SECTION IV Page 73 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material
or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be
removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty-
four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with
name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier
where replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
902-1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation of twenty-four inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior
to installation of main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final
acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or
missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer
prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the
FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public.
902-1.1.3. WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of
Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater.
SECTION IV
Page 74 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-1.2. PRODUCTS
902-1.2.1. GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
902-1.2.2. PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
902-1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
902-1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended
by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
902-1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
902-1.2.6. GATE VALVES
902-1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem
5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
SECTION IV Page 75 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/21 AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 2001b. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with two inch (2") square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key"
shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut.
902-1.2.7. SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
902-1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance -pressure across -the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm
shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1") slip
by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
902-1.2.9. VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete
value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10") circular valve box with
#181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
SECTION IV Page 76 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover
comparable to Brooks or approved equal.
902-1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION
902-1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene
tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers
at a specified spacing (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and
conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57
inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the
tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of
plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer
diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
902-1.2.10.2.OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline
pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system
pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be
seven inch (7").
B. For on -surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall
be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every
change of direction.
902-1.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub -surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
902-1.2.10.4.AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
902-1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy
shall be within +/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high -impact
SECTION IV Page 77 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless
steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water
passage.
902-12.10.6. FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
902-1.2.10.7. FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
902-1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter
device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field
Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may
be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if
submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if
submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure
waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws
allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year
regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations
either sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each,
station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute
increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching
solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field
Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall
be capable of manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
902-1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery.
SECTION IV Page 78 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A
beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
' one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
I Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
902-1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
902-1.3. EXECUTION
902-1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details
of the work.
1 B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
' shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
1 E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Specifications.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
1 decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler
equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities.
Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this
1 information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the
installation.
1
SECTION IV Page 79 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior
to roadway base.
902-1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
902-1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and
between all lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of
45 degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
902-1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the
pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger
than one half inch (%2").
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum
density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers.
When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six
inches (6") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face
area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent
damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
902-1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
SECTION IV Page 80 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site
and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method and maintain the staking of approved
layout.
902-1.3.3. INSTALLATION
902-1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to
the Owner.
902-1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Specifications.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male
threads only.
902-1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
902-1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or
handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
SECTION IV Page 81 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty-
four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement.
All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished
at no additional cost.
902-1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior
to installation.
902-1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6"), nor less than four inches
(4") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance
clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks,
buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of
pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
902-1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
SECTION IV Page 82 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-2. LANDSCAPE
902-2.1. GENERAL
902-2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor,
unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
902-2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental
to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and
as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
902-2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under
the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be
made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of
work on the project.
B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's
convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If
conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be
considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons
in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health
SECTION IV Page 83 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be
held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or
non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Article.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call"/"Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative
offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
902-2.1.4. SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be
established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
902-2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
902-2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied
state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SECTION IV Page 84 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.: Straight trunk.
MIN: Minimum.
GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.: Diameter.
LVS.: Leaves.
D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP: Plants per pot.
FG: Field grown.
STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner 's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of
quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape
Contractor.
Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who
produces the landscape Plans and Specifications.
902-2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
902-2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior
to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break
branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant
delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been
cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled
by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
SECTION IV Page 85 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not
less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1") caliper of trunk; root ball
depth shall not be less than two-thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which
cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning
to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the
site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve
inches (12") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms,
only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and
handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots
shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within
twenty-four (24) hours of delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
14. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping.
Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded
area.
902-2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS
902-2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions
and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
SECTION IV Page 86 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or
seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting
operations.
902-2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor
shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress
schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request
from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of
material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the
Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs
which may result from work stoppage.
902-2.1.8.3. UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a mariner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
902-2.2. PRODUCTS
902-2.2.1. MATERIALS
902-2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule.
Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture,
L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on
Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions) or conforms with names accepted in the
nursery trade.
902-2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species
and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases,
defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and
shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
SECTION IV Page 87 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida
Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the
place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for
name, variety, size, quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the
Landscape Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment
to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement
shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning
for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the
plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with
the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price.
Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant
and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls
and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures.
J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves
the substitution.
K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition
exists.
902-2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty-
four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it
will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
SECTION IV Page 88 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity,
germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
902-2.2.1.4. MULCH
A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the
PLANTING DETAILS in the plans.
902-2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming
to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all
plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet
(1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one-fourth
(1/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e.
manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
902-2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2")
caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2") caliper
and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree
shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a
minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x
4" by 16" wood connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used
around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
902-2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL
SECTION IV Page 89 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable
for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape
Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of one-third (1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1").
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There
must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or
carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and
toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance
to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil,
such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three
inches (3") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full
length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8")
into native soil.
902-2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
902-2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade
shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area
surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the
tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade.
902-2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
902-2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
902-2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
SECTION IV Page 90 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-2.3. EXECUTION
902-2.3.1. PREPARATION
902-2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
902-2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo"
and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the
same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor
at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage
without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches
(1'/2") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the
excavated material off the site.
902-2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches
(3") of one-third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic
soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic
layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by
"crowning' to ensure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates.
Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
902-2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
SECTION IV Page 91 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub -
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4").
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush
to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard
drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound
(1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial
grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release
form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4") of soil.
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition.
902-2.3.2. INSTALLATION
902-2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well -
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
902-2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally
accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an eighteen inch (18") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer
leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all
plant sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the Plans.
SECTION IV Page 92 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of
the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface
will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball
about one inch (1") higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle
and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each %2" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire,
and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom
of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade.
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of
the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball.
Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight
or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a
minimum of eighteen inches (18") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the
plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
SECTION IV Page 93 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-2.3.2.4. SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil
adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to
all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen
per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is
laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas.
Cut down soil level to one inch (1") to one and one half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks
prior to laying sod.
D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient
water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches
(2") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep
sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per
manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with
suitable wooden pins or by other approved method.
902-2.3.2.5. SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
902-2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall
be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by
approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4')
height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30") of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall
be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2
SECTION IV Page 94 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands.
Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after
the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
902-2.3.2.7. MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch.
Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run-off.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings.
Maintain a minimum three inch (3") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum
six inch (6") clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6") of non -mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
902-2.3.2.8. PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and
branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
902-2.3.2.9. CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
902-2.3.2.10. PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
SECTION IV Page 95 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as
specified.
902-2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done
by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor
who is responsible for the damage.
902-2.3.3. MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the
Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University
of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1")
of water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
902-2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
902-2.3.4.1. INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications,
the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
902-2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in the Plans and Specifications.
SECTION IV Page 96 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the
Landscape Architect that the correction has been made.
902-2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all
other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under -specified plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed
specifications.
902-2.3.5. WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period
of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead
or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the
Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the
warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or
workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no
additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be
given the equal amount of warranty.
903. SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable
depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed
with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller
immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit
SECTION IV Page 97 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy-
two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be
thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as
needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions,
to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable
to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation.
Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis
of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor
provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
904. SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no
wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia.
No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 201b. of Rye Seed (to total 60 ib. of seed per
acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said
seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including
water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and
accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as
stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
905-1. SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant
beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental
pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated
areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting
irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified
landscaped street areas including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
SECTION IV Page 98 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
1 • Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
' The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between
the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The
City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours.
1 All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be
completed before leaving the job site.
1 905-3. WORK METHODS
1 905-3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any
variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
905-3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
1 905-3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS
Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the
1 Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes,
vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report
such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from
' the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon
completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by
' the Contractor.
905-3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK
' The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty-four
(24) hours after providing the service.
905-3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
' All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size
of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a
neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
1
1 SECTION IV Page 99 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, consistent with the following specification:
905-3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE,
ETC.)
' Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads
that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation,
1 such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on
palms.
905-3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
1 Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
905-3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
' Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users
are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian
use areas.
905-3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts
' will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
905-3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
1 Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor
at their expense.
905-3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually three inches (3").
905-3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating
schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system
1 running time.
SECTION IV Page 100 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
905-3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
905-3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
905-3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility.
Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants,
securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will
furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor
one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After
uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility.
Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the
City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in
place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at
any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be
compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-
hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the
covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and
Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should
freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed
by the City.
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE
The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven
(7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no
further than ten (10) calendar days apart.
907. COMPLETION OF WORK
Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said
completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message.
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
SECTION IV
Page 101 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
given forty-eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has
been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12)
month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation
operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape
materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they
feel appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade
practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused
by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the
specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the
Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular
payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences and shall
schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
910. TREE PROTECTION
910-1. TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging
and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2") lumber for upright
posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1')
anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8')
apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1") by four -inch (4")
lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
SECTION IV
Page 102 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City' s representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment,
chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective
barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
910-2. ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging
a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree
pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited.
Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be
pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing grade or to the depth of
the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. The City's
Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior
Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562-4747, or through the construction
inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected
and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible,
but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree
protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
SECTION IV
Page 103 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk
diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior
to said root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the
disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18").
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this
purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative,
prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require
a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned
trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning
requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as
opposed to open trenching.
910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other
Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community
Development Code.
C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion -tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances
and Community Development Code.
SECTION IV
Page 104 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of
Ordinances and Community Development Code.
SECTION IV Page 105 of 105 Updated 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Z
1 L. ce
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PROJECT MANUAL
0
0
ce
0
1
ag)
w
w
0
z
Lu
North Garden Avenue Parking Garage
28 North Garden Avenue
Clearwater, Florida 33755
Issue Date:
August 8, 2019
Biller Reinhart Project No. 18-190
City of Clearwater Project No. 18 -0033 -EN
Biller Reinhart Engineering Group, Inc.
State of Florida Certificate of Authorization No. 9149
Brian Walter, P.E.
Florida License No. 66538
WWW.BILLERREINHART.COM
TAMPA 1 ST. PETERSBURG 1 LAKELAND 1 FT. LAUDERDALE
3434 Colwell Avenue, Suite 100, Tampa, Florida 33614 - t: 813.908.7203, f: 813.931.5200
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Project Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
General Structural Notes
Division 0 Specifications
Section 00300 - Bid Tabulation
Division 1 Specifications
Section 01010 - Summary of Work
Division 3 Specifications
Section 03720 - Concrete Repair: Horizontal, Vertical,
and Overhead Surfaces
Section 03740 - Concrete Crack Repair
PAGE(S)
1
00300-1
01010-1 to 01010-7
03720-1 to 03720-9
03740-1 to 03740-6
Division 7 Specifications
Section 07185 — Vehicular Traffic Deck Coating 07185-1 to 07185-7
Section 07190 — Vertical Surface Water Repellent Treatment 07190-1 to 07190-5
07900-1 to 07900-7
07920-1 to 07920-8
Section 07900 - Expansion Joint Replacement
Section 07920 - Joint Sealant/Joint Fillers
Division 9 Specifications
Section 09221 - Stucco Repair
Section 09900 - Painting
1
09221-1 to 09221-8
09900-1 to 09900-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 0 Specifications
SECTION 00300 - BID TABULATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Project
Project: The North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
City of Clearwater
100 South Myrtle Avenue, #200
Clearwater, Florida 33756
ivan.dimitrov@MyClearwater.com
1.2 Acknowledgements
The bidding contractor, having submitted a bid for this project,
acknowledges the following:
A. The bidding contractor is qualified to meet the requirements of the
Project Manual for the above referenced project.
B. The bidding contractor has visited and has become familiar with the
project site and conditions.
C. The bidding contractor understands the requirements of the Project
Manual for the above referenced project.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
3.0 EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION 00300
BID TABULATION 00300-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 1 Specifications
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
' 1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
IA. Project: The North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
I B. Owner: City of Clearwater
c/o Mr. Ivan Dimitrov, E.I.
100 South Myrtle Avenue, #200
1 Clearwater, Florida 33756
Email: ivan.dimitrov@MyClearwater.com
IC. Contractor shall submit a Construction Sequencing Plan which
demonstrates a process of completing the work while maintaining full
1 access for owners.
D. Project Scope: The work of this contract consists of the following
Iitems:
1. General Requirements - All work not listed below required for
Isuccessful completion of this project, including but not
necessarily limited to:
i. Bonding and permitting fees — To be billed at direct cost.
Iii. Mobilization.
iii. Traffic Control: Work shall include maintaining traffic
I within the limits of the project for the duration of the
construction period. Work includes submitting a
Construction Sequencing Plan and Traffic Control Plan,
1 which demonstrates the process of completing the work
while maintaining parking access.
2. Concrete Repair - Vertical and Overhead Surfaces
I
i.
ii. Remove existing concrete surface finish, if applicable.
Sound concrete surfaces and mark for repair.
iii. Allow Engineer to review all areas marked for repair.
I iv. Repair concrete delaminated areas, spalls, cracked and
exposed metals in vertical and overhead concrete
surfaces following ICRI guidelines.
I 3. Concrete Repair - Horizontal Surface
i. Remove existing concrete surface finish, if applicable.
ii. Sound concrete surfaces and mark for repair.
1 iii. Allow Engineer to review all areas marked for repair.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 1 Specifications
iv. Repair concrete delaminated areas, spalls, cracked and
exposed metals in horizontal concrete surfaces following
ICRI guidelines.
4. Repair of Double -T Shear Connectors
i. Clean and coat rust -stained, surface corroded shear
connector bars at locations throughout the parking
garage. Refer to detail 2/S3.1.
ii. At damaged/broken shear connectors, remove and
replace with new reinforcing steel bar at locations shown
on drawings. Refer to detail 1/S3.1.
5. Expansion Joint
i. Remove and replace with new expansion joint in the area
shown on drawings. Work includes necessary surface
preparation as per manufacturer's surface preparation
requirements.
6. Installation of Heavy -Duty Traffic Grade Waterproofing
Membrane — Refer to Specification 07185.
i. Installation of a waterproof deck membrane in areas
shown on the drawings. Work includes necessary surface
preparation to accept waterproofing membrane as per
manufacturer's surface preparation requirements. Work
includes all cant beads at slab transitions and membrane
shall extend over cant beads.
7 Sealants
i. Remove and replace all existing sealants throughout the
parking garage, including but not necessarily limited to
interface between:
a. Control joints
b. Topping slab and sidewalk
c. Top concrete surfaces and pre -cast wall panels
d. Sidewalks and pre -cast concrete wall panels
e. Sidewalks and concrete columns
f. Concrete stair system and concrete walls
g. General - interfaces of concrete elements
h. Window frame to wall surface at the northeast
elevator enclosure
i. Top of slab surface and vertical surfaces
j. Exterior wall panel and column
k. Exterior wall panel and panel
ii. Installation of any absent horizontal to vertical concrete
surface interface sealants.
8. Restoration of Handrail System in Exterior Stair Towers
i. Handrail Post Base Repairs
a. Excavate existing concrete to expose corroding
metal handrail post base.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 1 Specifications
b. Clean metal surfaces of corrosion, coat metal and
concrete areas with bonding agent and anti-
corrosion coating.
i. When section loss at post base is
encountered, repair via splicing new pipe
segment. Refer to detail 4/S3.2.
c. Replace excavated post pocket with new post
pocket material.
d. Fill interior of posts with grout at all handrail posts.
Refer to detail 6/S3.2.
e. Seal handrail post base perimeter with urethane
sealant.
ii. Paint Metal Handrail System
a. Remove existing paint coating and any surface
corrosion via sandblasting.
b. Paint metal handrail surfaces. Refer to
Specification 09900.
9. Stucco Repair — Refer to Specification 09921 and drawing
details 1 and 2/S3.2
i. Remove and replace existing metal corner beads at the
front arched facade framing and exterior columns along
the east elevation.
a. Remove existing stucco finish to expose existing
corner beads.
b. Remove existing metal corner beads and replace
with PVC corner beads
c. Replace stucco finish at affected areas.
ii. Remove and replace any damaged and/or failing stucco
finish throughout the parking garage.
iii. Option: Remove and replace all stucco finish system
along the east elevation, including all necessary
accessories and include use of corrosion resistant
accessories.
10. Exterior Metal Wall Framing Repair
i. At areas of stucco removal and replacement, when
corroding metal framing is encountered, metal framing is
to be repaired or replaced, and/or cleaned of corrosion
and primed.
11. Paint and Seal Exterior Fagade/Wall Surfaces
i. Existing Painted Front (East) Wall Surfaces and Facade -
Power wash and paint the front (east) elevation on the
first level, including front columns, planter walls, office
half walls and arched facade per Specification 09900.
ii. Exterior Stair and Elevator Towers — Power wash and
paint northeast and southwest towers - exterior wall
surfaces - per Specification 09900.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 1 Specifications
iii. Clean and seal all aggregate finished exterior vertical
concrete surfaces with a vertical surface water repellent.
Refer to Specification 07190.
12. Garage Interior Power Washing
i. Power wash before construction and after restoration is
complete throughout the parking garage at all horizontal
and interior vertical concrete surfaces.
E. The work of this contract shall be performed in accordance with the
contract documents. The contractor shall furnish all necessary labor,
tools, services, materials, and equipment to complete all the work of
this project.
F. The contract documents were prepared by Biller Reinhart Engineering
Group, Inc. and include the following:
1. Project Manual "For Bidding" dated June 7, 2019: includes all
specifications, drawings, etc. contained within.
G. The work will be constructed under a single contract between the
owner and the contractor.
1.2 Work Under Other Contracts
A. Subcontractors shall be competent and licensed to perform work in
their specific trades.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all subcontractors
hold a current license and are competent for the specific work they are
to perform.
C. The contractor shall not subcontract any portion of this project without
prior consent from the engineer. Names and references of all
subcontractors shall be submitted to the engineer for review.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
3.0 EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
SECTON 03720 - CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND
OVERHEAD SURFACES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required to repair, rehabilitate, or reconstruct spalled, deteriorated, or
structurally damaged concrete surfaces and concrete members. Depth of
repairs shall be adequate to restore the concrete member or slab to its
original dimensions after proper preparation to sound concrete. The
contractor shall repair all concrete surfaces and members as shown on
contract drawings or as specified herein. Refer to Specification Section
00300 — Bid Tabulation.
1.2 References
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) — latest editions of
the following standards:
ASTM C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C 109 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars -- Modified.
ASTM C 348 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
ASTM C 469 Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression.
ASTM C 496 Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
ASTM C 596 Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing
Portland Cement.
ASTM C 666 Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid
Freezing and Thawing.
ASTM C 779 Test Method of Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal
Concrete Surfaces.
ASTM C 806 Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Expansive
Cement Mortar.
ASTM C 878-87 Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Shrinkage
Compensating Concrete.
ASTM C 882 Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin Systems
Used with Concrete.
ASTM C 1042 Test Method for Bond Strength of Latex Systems used
with Concrete.
ASTM C 1202 Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete's
Ability to Resistance to Chloride Ion Penetration.
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-1
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Manual of Standard Practice (latest
edition)
C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) guidelines (latest
editions).
1.3 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, and laboratory test results that validate product
compliance with the requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall submit warranty information confirming that the
materials used will work as a compatible, warranted system.
C. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 5 -year warranty against workmanship
(contractor) and material failure (manufacturer).
1.4 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.5 Pre -Bid Inspection
The repair areas shown on the drawings or specified for repair are based on a
general survey. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to
determine the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include total
quantities of each repair type along with unit prices for quantities over or
below the engineering estimate.
1.6 Environmental Conditions
Repair materials shall not be applied without protection in temperature below
45°F (7°C) nor when the temperature is expected to fall below 45 F (7°C)
during the curing period unless otherwise specified by the material
manufacturer. Repair material shall not be applied to frozen surfaces.
All materials used for the repair work must be VOC compliant. The
manufacturer shall supply the appropriate material safety data sheets upon
request.
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-2
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
1.7 Site Conditions
Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material placement
within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions as
uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to the engineer's
attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions include but are not
limited to poor quality base concrete, severely corroded reinforcing steel,
random cracks and deep oil penetration.
1.8 Shoring and Support
When removal and repair of deteriorated structural concrete may cause
temporary weakness, excessive deflections or structural instability, shoring or
other suitable supports shall be provided until completion and adequate
curing of repairs.
The Contractor shall submit cut sheets with certified capacities for shoring to
be used. Shoring plans, if required, shall be prepared, signed, and sealed by
an Engineer registered in the State of Florida.
1.9 Material Handling
The material shall be delivered in the original, unopened containers. It shall
be labeled with the manufacturer's name, product name, and lot number.
Store materials at the job site under dry conditions and at temperatures
between 50°F (10°C) and 90°F (32°C).
1.10 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The repair contractor shall have experience and proficiency specific to
all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-3
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any concrete repair materials for observation or testing shall be borne
by the Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.4.
2.1 Horizontal Deck/Pavement/Floors Surface Repairs and Overlays (no
exposed reinforcing steel)
A. Thicknesses from 1/4" (minimum depth) to 1/2":
MasterEmaco T 310 CI by Master Builders Solutions
Thin -Top Supreme by Euclid
MasterEmaco T 302 by Master Builders Solutions
SikaQuick 1000 by Sika
B. Thicknesses Greater than 1/2":
MasterEmaco T 1061 by Master Builders Solutions
MasterEmaco T 310 CI by Master Builders Solutions
Concrete -Top Supreme by Euclid
SikaQuick 1000 by Sika
C. Rapid Set, High Early Strength Repairs:
MasterEmaco T 1061 by Master Builders Solutions
MasterEmaco T 430 by Master Builders Solutions
Euco-Speed MP by Euclid
SikaQuick 1000 by Sika
D. Lightweight Self -leveling Underlayment:
Ultraplan 1 Plus or Novoplan 2 by Mapei
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-4
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
2.2 Horizontal Deck/Pavement/Floors Structural Repairs (exposed
reinforcing steel)
A. Thicknesses Greater than 1":
MasterEmaco T 1061 by Master Builders Solutions
MasterEmaco S 466 CI or S 477 CI by Master Builders Solutions
Eucocrete by Euclid
Sikacrete 211 by Sika
B. Formed and Full Depth Repairs:
MasterEmaco S 466 CI or S 477 CI, or MasterEmaco T 240 by Master
Builders Solutions
Eucocrete by Euclid
MasterEmaco S440 MC or S440 by Master Builders Solutions
Sikacrete 211 by Sika
2.3 Vertical/Overhead Repairs
MasterEmaco S series or NR350 CI by Master Builders Solutions
MasterEmaco N 400 or N 400 RS by Master Builders Solutions
SikaTop 123 Plus or SikaRepair 223 by Sika
Verticoat or Verticoat Supreme by Euclid
2.4 Guardrail Post Pockets
MasterFlow 100 Grout by Master Builders Solutions
NS Grout by Euclid
SikaGrout 212 by Sika
2.5 Guardrail Post Interiors
E3 -F by Euclid
MasterFlow 648 by Master Builders Solutions
Sikadur 42, Grout -Pak by Sika
2.6 Accessory Products
A. Epoxy/Cement Bonding Agent:
MasterEmaco P 124 by Master Builders Solutions
Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem by Sika
Duralprep A.C. by Euclid
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-5
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
B. Epoxy/Cement Protective Coating for Reinforcing Steel:
MasterEmaco P 124 by Master Builders Solutions
Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem by Sika
Duralprep A.C. by Euclid
2.7 Estimating
Refer to manufacturer's literature for material yields and coverages. Actual
usage will vary depending on the profile and planeness of the repair surface
and should be verified by the contractor. The contractor shall install the
material at the thicknesses specified herein or on drawings and shall be
familiar with site conditions to determine appropriate material quantities.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 References
ACI 302.1R-89 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction"
ACI 304 R-89, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete"
ACI 305, "Hot Weather Concreting"
ACI 306, "Cold Weather Concreting"
ACI 318-89, Section 12, "Development and Splices of Reinforcement"
ACI 362 R-85, "State -of -the -Art Report on Parking Structures"
ACI 503.4 "Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy
Mortars"
ACI 504 R-90 "Guide to Sealing Joints in Concrete Structures"
ACI 506R-85, "Guide to Shotcrete"
ACI 546.1 R-80, "Guide for Repair of Concrete Bridge Superstructures"
3.2 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of concrete repairs, the contractor shall
conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work.
Surface preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing,
placing and finishing procedures, and site conditions shall be discussed with
the engineer prior to the beginning of the work.
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, material
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the City of
Clearwater (Owner) and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of
the meeting.
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
3.3 General Interior and Exterior Concrete Repairs
A. Surface Preparation
Concrete surfaces must be clean and rough. All oil, dirt, debris, paint,
and unsound concrete must be removed. The surface must be
prepared mechanically using a scabbier, bushhammer, chipping
hammer, shotblast, or scarifier which will give a surface profile of a
minimum 1/8" and expose the coarse aggregate of the concrete. The
final step in cleaning shall be the complete removal of all dust, dirt, and
residue by pressure washing and/or vacuum. The contractor shall
follow all surface preparation requirements set forth in the
manufacturer's written documentation.
C. Joints
Existing joints shall be maintained by forming at joint locations or
sawcutting over joint locations.
D. Inspection and Treatment of Reinforcing Steel
All reinforcement which is loose shall be secured in its proper position
by tying to other secured bars.
When any reinforcing steel is corroded to the extent that the cross-
sectional area at any point of a bar has been reduced by more than
20% from the original cross section, the Engineer shall be notified.
Place new reinforcing steel, if any, into repair cavity making sure to lap,
splice, and embed as per requirements set forth by the Engineer.
Exposed reinforcing steel shall be treated with two coats of
epoxy/cement protective coating for reinforcing steel. Remove all loose
rust and scaling by sandblasting or wire wheel prior to coating the
rebar.
E. Bonding
After the concrete surface has been prepared and cleaned, apply
epoxy/cement bonding agent or a brush coat of the repair mortar. The
contractor shall follow all surface preparation requirements set forth in
the manufacturer's written documentation.
F Forming and Reinforcing Placement
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-7
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
Where forms are required, construct watertight forms with sufficient
rigidity and strength to withstand head pressure and prevent deflection
of forms during material placement. Forms shall be put in place after
the anti -corrosion application to reinforcing steel and bonding agent
application to repair surface. Provide adequate clearance to place
material. On pumped applications without open top forms, provide a
port connection of sufficient diameter to allow pumping into form.
G. Mixing of Repair Materials
Small quantities may be mixed with a drill and "jiffy" mixer. Use a
paddle type mortar mixer for typical jobs. For large or pumped jobs,
bulk bagged material mixed in a ready -mix truck or a mixer/pump
combination may be used where material workability permits. All
materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (15°C) to
90°F (32°C). Add the appropriate amount of water for the batch size
and then add the dry product. Mix for 3 to 5 minutes. If pea gravel is
added, mix an additional 2-3 minutes after its addition. The mixed
product should be transported by buggy or pumped to the repair area
and placed immediately. Refer to the manufacturer's technical data
sheet for specific mixing requirements.
H. Placing of Repair Materials
1. Horizontal
Discharge material from mixer into wheelbarrow or buggy and
transport to placement area. Discharge into repair area and
spread with a trowel, come -a -long, or square tipped shovel to a
thickness that meets the surrounding concrete or matches pre-
set elevation points. On Targe areas, use screed strips or forms
and screed to level with hand held straightedge. Bull float
surface after placement.
2. Formed/Pumped
Place material into the form. For open top form configurations,
consolidate material by rodding or Tight vibration. On closed
forms and pumped applications, tap the outside of the form with
a rubber mallet for consolidation.
3. Vertical/Overhead Trowel Applied
Product should be placed in lifts as required by the product
manufacturer. Trowel into place and allow to stiffen before the
next lift. Multiple lifts may be placed as long as the previous lift
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-8
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
is well textured. If additional lifts will be placed after the product
has hardened, crosshatch the surface of the previous lift to
provide for a secure bond for the next lift.
5. Guardrail Post Interiors
The contractor shall fill the bottoms of the guardrail post interiors
with epoxy grout.
a. Drill 1/8" to 1/4" diameter holes in the left or right side
(not the interior or exterior side) of the guardrail post.
b. The holes shall be located 1/2" and 1" above the surface
of the concrete slab.
c. The holes shall be below horizontal guardrail members.
d. Fill the guardrail post with epoxy grout through the top
hole.
e. Continue filling the post until epoxy grout escapes
through the bottom hole.
I. Finishing
Finish the repair area to the specified texture. Do not add additional
water to the surface during the finishing operation. If additional liquid is
required, use a finishing aid/evaporation retardant (submit product
technical data for engineer review prior to use). Unless otherwise
specified, repair surfaces shall receive a broomed finish. Formed
surfaces may be stripped after 24 hours at normal curing
temperatures.
J. Curing
Proper curing procedures are required to ensure the durability and
quality of the repair. If a curing compound is to be used, submit product
technical data for engineer review prior to use. In lieu of a curing
compound, the repair may be covered with polyethylene for a minimum
of three (3) days. Follow all of the manufacturer's curing requirements
as per the product's written technical data.
K. Clean-up
Clean tools and equipment with brush and water before the material
hardens.
END OF SECTION 03720
CONCRETE REPAIR: HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, AND 03720-9
OVERHEAD SURFACES
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
SECTION 03740 - CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY
FEED
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required to repair structural cracks in concrete members. Structural cracks in
concrete members shall be repaired via epoxy injection or gravity feed with
epoxy resin adhesive. The contractor shall repair all structural concrete
cracks as shown on contract drawings or as specified herein. Refer to
Specification Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
1.2 Related Sections
03720 Concrete Repair: Horizontal, Vertical, and Overhead Surfaces
07920 Joint Sealant/Joint Fillers
1.3 References
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) — latest editions of
the following standards:
ASTM C 881 Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin Based Bonding
Systems for Concrete.
ASTM C 882 Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin Systems
Used with Concrete.
ASTM D 570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
ASTM D 638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastic.
ASTM D 648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastic Under
Flexural Load.
ASTM D 695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
ASTM D 732 Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch
Tool.
ASTM D 790 Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
ASTM D 2393 Test Method for Viscosity of Epoxy Resins and Related
Components.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Manual of Standard Practice (latest
edition)
ACI 224.1 R Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete
Structures
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY FEED 03740-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
ACI 503R Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete.
C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) guidelines (latest
editions).
1.4 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, and laboratory test results that validate product
compliance with the requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall submit warranty information confirming that the
materials used will work as a compatible, warranted system.
C. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 5 -year °warranty against
workmanship (contractor) and material failure (manufacturer).
1.5 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.6 Pre -Bid Inspection
The repair areas shown on the drawings or specified for repair are based on a
general survey. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to
determine the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include total
quantities of each repair type along with unit prices for quantities over or
below the engineering estimate.
1.7 Project Conditions
A. Do not use products under conditions of precipitation or freezing
weather. Use appropriate measures for protection and supplementary
heating to ensure proper curing conditions in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations if application during inclement
weather occurs.
B. Protect adjacent work from contamination due to mixing, handling, and
application of epoxy resin adhesive products.
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY FEED 03740-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
1.8 Site Conditions
Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material placement
within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions as
uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to the engineer's
attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions include but are not
limited to poor quality base concrete, severely corroded reinforcing steel,
random cracks and deep oil penetration.
1.9 Shoring and Support
When repair of deteriorated structural concrete may cause temporary
weakness, excessive deflections or structural instability, shoring or other
suitable supports shall be provided until completion and adequate curing of
repairs.
The Contractor shall submit cut sheets with certified capacities for shoring to
be used. Shoring plans, if required, shall be prepared, signed, and sealed by
an Engineer registered in the State of Florida.
1.10 Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver products in original factory packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration date as
applicable. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.
B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage,
construction activity, precipitation and direct sunlight in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Condition products to approximately 60° to 70° F (16° to 21° C) for use
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Handle all products with appropriate precautions and care as stated on
the Material Safety Data Sheet.
1.11 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The repair contractor shall have experience, training, and proficiency
specific to all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY FEED 03740-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any concrete repair materials for observation or testing shall be borne
by the Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.5.
2.1 Epoxy Resin
A. Material Property Requirements
Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638
Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790
Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695
Bond Strength, ASTM C 882, 14 -day
Viscosity
B. Acceptable Materials
7,500 psi
12,000 psi
11,000 psi
2,000 psi
300-375 cps
Masterinject 1500 by Master Builders Solutions
Eucopoxy Injection Resin by Euclid
Prime Rez 1000 High Mod by Prime Resins
Sikadur 35, Hi -Mod LV or Hi -Mod LV LPL by Sika
2.2 Epoxy Gel
MasterEmaco ADH 327 RS by Master Builders Solutions
EUCO #452 Gel or EUCO #620 Gel by Euclid
Prime Gel 2000 High Mod or 2100 Low Mod by Prime Resins
Sikadur 33 by Sika
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY FEED 03740-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
2.3 Injection Ports
One-way polyethylene valves or ports
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of concrete repairs, the contractor shall
conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work.
Surface preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing,
placing and finishing procedures, and site conditions shall be discussed with
the engineer prior to the beginning of the work.
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, material
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the contractor
and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.
3.2 Preparation
A. Remove dirt, dust, algae, laitance, efflorescence, deteriorated
concrete, and/or any other materials that will prohibit adequate cap
seal adhesion from the surface by mechanical means.
B. Remove loose dust, obstructions, and any other materials that will
prohibit adequate performance from the areas to be repaired by
vacuum, oil -free compressed air, or other approved means.
3.3 Application
A. Mixing: Follow the manufacturer's recommended procedures for mixing
epoxy.
B. Injection Ports: Place epoxy injection ports as required for proper
application. Port spacing shall not be less than the thickness of the
concrete being repaired.
C. Cap Seal: Seal surface of crack with epoxy gel as necessary to
prevent leakage of the injection resin. Cap seal through -cracks on
opposite side of substrate as necessary to prevent leakage of the
injection resin.
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY FEED 03740-5
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 3 Specifications
D. Injection: Apply mixed low viscosity epoxy resin using recognized
procedures without entrapping air or water. Low viscosity epoxy resin
crack fill shall be a minimum 90%.
1. Vertical and Inclined Orientations: Start injection process on port
at the lowest elevation. When epoxy shows at port above, caps
the lower entry port and continues the injection process on the
second port. Continue the process until all ports have been
injected and pressure is maintained.
2. Horizontal Orientation: Injection from one end of the crack to the
other using the same port -to -port procedures mentioned above.
When possible, inject from bottom side of structure (overhead).
E. Gravity Feed: Surface seal the bottom side of the structure with epoxy
gel. Route a v -notch in the crack. Pour neat epoxy resin into the v -
notch until the crack is completely full. Low viscosity epoxy resin crack
fill shall be a minimum 90%.
F. Clean Up: After sufficient cure of the epoxy resin, remove ports and
cap seal by appropriate methods, leaving an accepted finish.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Verify the quality of installation by via core samples as directed by the
engineer.
END OF SECTION 03740
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR: EPDXY INJECTION/GRAVITY FEED 03740-6
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
SECTION 07185 — VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required to provide a complete polyurethane waterproofing coating system
where indicated on the contract documents, including all applicable sealants
and elastomeric flashings needed to ensure a complete waterproof and
weathertight system for deck, ramp, and raised curb surfaces at locations
indicated.
1.2 Related Sections
07920 Joint Sealant/Joint Fillers
1.3 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, application instructions, sample warranty, and
laboratory test results that validate product compliance with the
requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 5 -year warranty against
workmanship (contractor) and material failure (manufacturer). The
manufacturer shall warrant that installed waterproof coating system
shall be free of defects including adhesive failure, cohesive failure,
weathering deficiencies, and waterproofing failure resulting from
substrate cracking up to 1/16 inch.
C. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference
projects of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts
of architects/engineers and owners for verification.
1.4 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.5 Pre -Bid Inspection
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to determine the extent
of the required work. Final bid shall include total quantities of each repair
type along with unit prices for quantities over or below the engineering
estimate.
1.6 Site Conditions
A. Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material
placement within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual
conditions as uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to
the engineer's attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions
include but are not limited to poor quality base concrete, severely
corroded reinforcing steel, random cracks, and deep oil penetration.
B. Substrate conditions
1. Provide applicator with surfaces that are broom clean, dry,
sound and free of voids, protrusions, excessive roughness,
foreign matter, frost, ice, and other contaminants that may
inhibit application or performance of the waterproofing coating
system.
2. Using suitable abrasive methods, remove residue of form
release, curing compound, chemical retarders, and other
surface treatments, laitance, residue, mill scale, rust, loose
material, and other contaminants from concrete, masonry and
ferrous metal surfaces to receive the work of this Section.
3. Concrete: Where work of this Section will be applied to
concrete, provide surfaces that are smooth with finish equal to
one that is light steel troweled followed by a fine hair broom.
4. Plywood: Where work of this Section will be applied to plywood,
provide exterior grade plywood, 5/8" thick minimum, with A -side
up, fastened with ring -shank nails.
5. Decks: Slope deck surfaces to drains that have flanges at
coating level which are flush with deck surfaces. Rigidly install
pipe, vents, and other surface protrusions, properly flash them,
and cover to prevent entry of coating materials.
6. Metal flashings: Where metal flashings are substrate to
waterproofing coating, set the flashings in continuous bedding
bead of urethane sealant; install sealant S -bead between metal
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
laps and mechanically fasten to substrate along leading edges
at every 4" on center, staggered linearly, to lay flat.
7. Joints: Configuration shall be consistent with all applicable
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.8 Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver products in original factory packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration date as
applicable. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.
B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage,
construction activity, precipitation and direct sunlight in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Products shall
be maintained as per the manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Handle all products with appropriate precautions and care as stated on
the Material Safety Data Sheet.
1.9 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The contractor shall have experience, training, and proficiency specific
to all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any materials for observation or testing shall be borne by the
Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.4.
2.1 General
A. Provide a complete cold liquid applied polyurethane waterproofing
coating system to include a waterproofing membrane and integral
wearing surface.
B. The system shall be designed for waterproofing decks subject to
vehicular traffic.
C. The colors, patterns, finishes, etc. shall be selected by the owner from
the manufacturer's standard options.
2.2 Acceptable Products
MasterSeal Traffic 1500 Heavy Duty System by BASF
2.3 Acceptable Fast Curing Products
Conipur II Heavy Duty System with Conipur 295 UV Top Coat by BASF
2.4 Accessories
A. Primer: As recommended by coating system manufacturer.
B. Aggregate: As approved by the coating manufacturer.
C. Sealant: As per Specification 07920.
D. Other Materials: Provide other materials, not specifically described but
required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the
contractor and approved by the coating system manufacturer as
compatible, subject to review of the engineer.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of concrete repairs, the contractor shall
conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work.
Surface preparation, product placement, and site conditions shall be
discussed with the engineer prior to the beginning of the work.
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, material
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the contractor
and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.
3.2 Mockup
Provide a mockup of approximately 100 square feet to include surface profile,
sealant joint, crack repair, flashing, and juncture details and allow for
evaluation of slip resistance and appearance of system.
3.3 Surface Preparation
A. All caulking, joint sealants, repairs, and concrete surface repairs shall
be installed and cured before the application of the waterproofing
membrane.
B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and
adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the
work of this Section.
C. Prior to application of the waterproofing membrane, concrete surfaces
shall be dry and cleaned of all dust, dirt, debris, grease, oil, grout,
mortar, and other foreign matter. Concrete repairs and all existing
surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the waterproofing
membrane manufacturer.
D. Clean all deck surfaces to receive the coating system in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum clean or blow
clean with oil -free compressed air all surfaces to receive sealants,
detailing materials, or coatings immediately prior to installation.
E. Rout, clean, prepare, and detail surface cracks in accord with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Install backer rod where required.
F. Clean metal surfaces to bright metal by wire brushing or mechanical
etching. Sand lead flashing and plastic surfaces.
G. Prime surfaces in accord with the manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Install 1/4" diameter backer rod into the corner of all horizontal -to -
vertical junctures subject to movement and cover with 1" detail cant of
approved sealant. Install 1" detail cants at projections, curbs, and
other horizontal -to -vertical junctures.
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-5
IProject Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
1 I. Install detail coats, joint and crack treatments, and liquid flashings in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
IJ. Allow detail applications to cure in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions prior to the application of the coating.
1 3.4 Application
I A. Install waterproof coating system in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions as applicable to the
work except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
IB. Grid the deck surfaces to assure proper coverage rates and verify
coating wet -film mil thickness with gauges as work progresses.
IC. Retain empty product containers during the course of the work to aid in
determining whether the completed coating system complies with the
1 manufacturers average thickness requirements.
D. Verify proper dry condition of the substrate using a method
1 recommended by the coating system manufacturer. Perform adhesion
checks prior to application of the coating system using field adhesion
test methods recommended by the manufacturer.
I
E. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive coating system.
IF. Wipe clean all detail coats with white rags wetted with Xylene solvent.
Do not saturate detail coat.
1 G. Apply system base coat uniformly and allow to cure in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions.
1 H. Feather edge when the entire area cannot be completed in one day.
Clean an area 6" wide along edge of the coating with Xylene solvent
I on clean white rags prior to startup on next working day. Use an
interlaminary primer per the manufacturer's instructions as needed.
Overlap existing work by 6" with new work.
II. Apply system intermediate wear coats in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Immediately broadcast aggregate
I into wet material at rate recommended by manufacturer and backroll to
evenly distribute and totally encapsulate the aggregate. Avoid void
spaces in between the individual pieces of aggregate. Allow to cure
1 per the manufacturer's written instructions.
1
IVEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-6
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
J. Apply coating system finish coat in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.5 Protection and Clean-up
A. Promptly remove primer or coating material from adjacent surfaces
with MEK, Toluene or Xylene. Leave work area in broom clean
condition.
B. Allow completed work to cure based on manufacturer's
recommendation before opening to vehicular traffic.
END OF SECTION 07185
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC DECK WATERPROOFING 07185-7
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
SECTION 07190 - VERTICAL SURFACE WATER REPELLENT TREATMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required to properly install a surface applied water repellent to vertical brick
and concrete surfaces. Refer to Specification Section 01010 - Summary of
Work.
1.2 Related Sections
07920 Joint Sealant/Joint Fillers
1.3 References
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Manual of Standard Practice (latest
edition)
B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) guidelines (latest
editions).
C. ASTM E514 "Water Permeance of Masonry"- 100% reduction in the
leakage rate over the control. Control wall must have a leakage rate of
at least 2.0 liters/hour
D. ASTM C67 "Brick and Structural Clay Tile" Part 7 Water Absorption -
98% reduction in water absorption
E. ASTM G53 "Accelerated Weathering" for 2000 hours - only 5% Toss of
effectiveness over initial water repellency
1.4 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, application instructions, sample warranty, and
laboratory test results that validate product compliance with the
requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions.
VERTICAL SURFACE WATER REPELLENT TREATMENT 07190-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
1.5 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.6 Pre -Bid Inspection
The repair areas shown on the drawings or specified for repair are based on a
general survey. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to
determine the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include total
quantities of each repair type along with unit prices for quantities over or
below the engineering estimate.
1.7 Site Conditions
A. Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material
placement within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual
conditions as uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to
the engineer's attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions
include but are not limited to poor quality base concrete, severely
corroded reinforcing steel, random cracks, and deep oil penetration.
B. Environmental Requirements: Water repellent shall not be applied
when surface or air temperatures are below 20° F or above 100° F. Do
not apply if rain is expected within 4 hours following application or if
precipitation has occurred within 24 hours prior to application.
1.8 Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver products in original factory packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration date as
applicable. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.
B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage,
construction activity, precipitation and direct sunlight in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Handle all products with appropriate precautions and care as stated on
the Material Safety Data Sheet.
VERTICAL SURFACE WATER REPELLENT TREATMENT 07190-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
1.9 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The repair contractor shall have experience, training, and proficiency
specific to all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any concrete repair materials for observation or testing shall be borne
by the Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.5.
2.1 Surface Applied Water Repellent
A clear, penetrating, breathable water repellent for brick and hardened
concrete.
2.2 Acceptable Products
Protectosil Chem -Trete BSM 400 by Evonik
2.3 Performance Requirements
A. Material must not leave a residue on non -porous surfaces.
B. Material must not change the existing surface appearance.
VERTICAL SURFACE WATER REPELLENT TREATMENT 07190-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
C. Penetration - visual penetration into brick - 0.25 inches average
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of concrete repairs, the contractor shall
conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work.
Surface preparation, product placement, and site conditions shall be
discussed with the engineer prior to the beginning of the work.
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, material
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the contractor
and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.
3.2 Surface Preparation
A. All caulking, joint sealants, repairs, concrete surface repairs shall be
installed and cured before the application of the water repellent.
B. Prior to application of the water repellent, brick and concrete surfaces
shall be dry and cleaned of all dust, dirt, debris, grease, oil, grout,
mortar, and other foreign matter. Concrete repairs and all existing
surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the water repellent
manufacturer.
3.3 Testing
Prior to water repellent application, a test area shall be used to verify product
performance requirements as listed above and as documented in the
manufacturer's technical information. The contractor shall arrange to have
the product manufacturer's representative visit the project site to verify
product suitability and performance.
3.4 Application
A. Water repellent shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Product net coverage rate and number of coats shall be as per the
manufacturer's written technical data — 2 coats (wet on wet) at a
coverage rate of 175-200 square feet per gallon.
VERTICAL SURFACE WATER REPELLENT TREATMENT 07190-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
C. All adjacent surfaces shall be protected as necessary so as to not
adversely affect the performance of other materials such as sealants,
coatings, paint, etc.
D. Comply with local and state regulations regarding health, safety, and
VOC (Volatile Organic Content) regulations.
3.5 Warranty
A. The water repellent manufacturer shall furnish the owner a written
single source performance warranty that the water repellent will be free
of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for a twenty
(20) year period from the date of completion of the work provided
under this section of the specifications.
B. The water repellent manufacturer shall be responsible for providing
labor and materials to retreat areas of the structure that do not comply
with the warranty requirements.
END OF SECTION 07190
VERTICAL SURFACE WATER REPELLENT TREATMENT 07190-5
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
SECTION 07900 — EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required to install expansion joint systems, where indicated on the contract
documents, as required to ensure a complete waterproof and weathertight
system for those locations indicated. The joints are proprietary designs
utilizing extruded elastomeric seals, elastomeric concrete headers, and
mounting plates.
1.2 Related Sections
03720 Concrete Repair
03740 Concrete Epoxy Crack Repair
07920 Joint Sealant/Joint Fillers
1.3 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, application instructions, sample warranty, and
laboratory test results that validate product compliance with the
requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 5 -year warranty against
workmanship (contractor) and material failure (manufacturer). The
warranty shall be a joint and several performance warranty, intending
that each party, Approved Installer and Manufacturer, will jointly
warrant and provide at no charge, all materials and labor needed to
properly repair or replace defective or damaged product within the term
of the provided warranty. In the event of either party's non-
performance, the full burden and responsibility for any warranty repair
shall fall upon the remaining party.
C. The Contractor shall submit written documentation of the applicator's
qualifications, including reference projects of similar scope and
complexity, with current phone contacts of architects/engineers and
owners for verification. The applicator shall be an approved installer
as certified by the product manufacturer.
D. The Contractor shall submit typical expansion joint cross-section(s)
indicating pertinent dimensioning, general construction, and blockout
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT 07900-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
dimensions. Approved Installers shall prepare and submit details of all
special conditions to the manufacturer for review and approval prior to
installation.
1.4 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.5 Pre -Bid Inspection
The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to determine the extent
of the required work. Final bid shall include total quantities of each repair
type along with unit prices for quantities over or below the engineering
estimate.
1.6 Site Conditions
A. Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material
placement within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual
conditions as uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to
the engineer's attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions
include but are not limited to poor quality base concrete, severely
corroded reinforcing steel, random cracks, and deep oil penetration.
B. The contractor shall provide the applicator with surfaces that are
broom clean, dry, sound and free of voids, protrusions, excessive
roughness, foreign matter, frost, ice, and other contaminants which
may inhibit application or performance of the expansion joint system.
1.7 Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver products in original factory packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration date as
applicable. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.
B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage,
construction activity, precipitation and direct sunlight in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Products shall
be maintained as per the manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Handle all products with appropriate precautions and care as stated on
the Material Safety Data Sheet.
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT 07900-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
1.8 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The contractor shall have experience, training, and proficiency specific
to all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing, and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any materials for observation or testing shall be borne by the
Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.4.
2.1 General
A. Provide a watertight expansion joint system that is capable of
accommodating multi -directional movement. System shall consist of
preformed thermoplastic rubber profiles with integral side flanges
typically cast into a preformed blockout by means of utilizing
manufacturer's ambient cure elastomeric concrete header.
B. The thermoplastic rubber seal element shall be sized to accommodate
the total range of movement as dictated by the engineer at each joint
location. Sizing shall be made in such a way as to ensure that the
elastomeric membrane seal will remain under a degree of compression
throughout the full movement cycle. Where required, provide a seal
that accepts pedestrian traffic. The contractor shall provide evidence
utilizing manufacturer's product data that the membrane seal will
comply with this requirement.
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT 07900-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
C. The seal profile design shall incorporate integral side flanges exhibiting a
pronounced serrated profile and factory punched holes that interlock the
profile into the elastomeric header material.
D. Provide manufacturer's 100 percent solids ambient cure elastomeric
concrete header material and pregraded aggregate.
E. Provide the bonding agent and apply to the sides and base of the
preformed concrete blockouts prior to the placement of the elastomeric
concrete header material. Store, mix, and apply in accordance with
manufacture's system data sheet.
F. Accessories: Provide necessary and related parts including preformed
or fabricated wall mount plates with appropriate anchors and sealants
where required for a complete installation.
2.2 Fabrication
A. Thermoplastic Rubber Membrane Seal: Ship in the longest practical
continuous length in the manufacturer's standard shipping carton or on
wooden pallets, shrink wrapped.
B. Joint Seal Directional Changes: At all horizontal changes in direction
provide seals with factory heat welded splices such as 90° corners,
tees, and crosses. The seal shall extend a minimum of 3'-0" in each
direction from the factory splice. Only straight, butt splice connections
shall be allowed on the jobsite following the manufacturers written
instructions utilizing specialty heat fusing equipment or the manufacturer
specialty -splicing adhesive. All factory and field fused connections shall
incorporate bonding of the complete seal profile. This includes fusing of
all internal and external web configurations.
C. Elastomeric Concrete Header: Resin shipped in gallon containers with
half gallon activator and 60 -pound containers of aggregate on wooden
pallets, shrink wrapped.
Wall Mount Plate (corner condition): Fabricated or preformed metal
profiles shall be shipped in standard 10 ft. lengths and shall be cut to
length on the jobsite where required. Plates shall be miter cut in the field
to conform to directional changes unless otherwise contracted with
expansion joint manufacturer.
2.3 Finishes
A. Thermoplastic Rubber Membrane Seal shall be supplied in standard
color: Black.
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT
07900-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
B. Elastomeric Concrete Header material shall be supplied in standard
color: Black. Contact the manufacturer for custom colors.
2.4 Acceptable Products
Horizontal Application
Wabocrete II Membrane 201 Expansion Joint System by Watson
Bowman Acme.
Wabocrete FMV Membrane 201 Expansion Joint System by Watson
Bowman Acme.
Delcrete/WAF-300 System by The D.S. Brown Company
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of the expansion joint work, the contractor
shall conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation
work. Surface preparation, product placement, and site conditions shall be
discussed with the engineer prior to the beginning of the work.
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, materia!
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the contractor
and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.
3.2 Surface Preparation
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and
adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the
work of this Section.
B. Prior to application of the expansion joint system, concrete surfaces
shall be dry and cleaned of all dust, dirt, debris, grease, oil, grout,
mortar, and other foreign matter. All existing surfaces shall be
prepared as recommended by the expansion joint system
manufacturer.
C. The contractor shall remove the existing expansion joint system, if
applicable, carefully to provide a clean, sound surface for installation of
the new expansion joint system.
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT 07900-5
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
D. Clean all surfaces to receive the expansion joint system in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions.
E. The contractor shall provide a properly formed, solid concrete blockout
per the manufacturer and project requirements. Any edge or area in
need of repair shall be repaired as per these specifications.
F. The contractor shall clean the concrete blockout of all contaminants
and impurities by sandblasting immediately prior to the expansion joint
system application. Concrete form release agents, water repellents,
laitance, surface dirt and rust, all old sealants, and other surface
treatments and protective coatings shall be removed from the blockout
substrate surface prior to the expansion joint system application.
G. Areas adjacent to the joint must be masked with tape to assure neat,
clean joint lines.
H. The blockout area shall be completely dry for the application of the
expansion joint system.
I. Concrete shall be fully cured (28 days) prior to placement of the
expansion joint system.
J. Blockouts requiring the use of concrete repair mortars shall be cured
for 72 hours (minimum) prior to the placement of the expansion joint
system.
K. The blockouts must be made to the dimensions and elevations shown
in the manufacturer's published data. Deviations from these
dimensions will not be allowed without the written consent of the
manufacturer.
3.4 Application
A. Install the expansion joint system in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions as applicable to the
work except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. The membrane seal element shall be unpacked and laid in a relaxed
position to relieve any temporary coiling from shipment packaging prior
to placement.
C. The winged flaps of the gland element shall be wiped with an
acceptable non -petroleum solvent cleaner (refer to the manufacturer's
cleaning recommendations).
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT 07900-6
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
D. Mix all expansion joint system components and install the membrane
system in strict accordance with the current manufacturer's installation
instructions. The installing contractor shall confirm that they are in
possession of the latest instructions prior to beginning work.
3.5 Protection
A. Allow completed work to cure before opening to pedestrian and/or
vehicular traffic.
B. Protect the expansion joint system during construction. Heavy
construction vehicles will not be permitted to cross the joint without
specific and written permission by the Engineer. Sub sequential damage
to the membrane system shall be repaired at the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 07900
EXPANSION JOINT REPLACEMENT 07900-7
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
SECTON 07920 - JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required for the following:
A. Seal non-structural cracks in concrete members
B. Seal or reseal joints. Provide elastomeric joint sealants, joint backer
materials and accessories needed to ensure a complete and durable
weather tight seal at all locations indicated.
Structural cracks in concrete members shall be repaired as per Specification
03740. The contractor shall repair all non-structural concrete cracks and
seal/reseal joints as shown on contract drawings or as specified herein.
1.2 Related Sections
03720 Concrete Repair: Horizontal, Vertical, and Overhead Surfaces
03740 Concrete Crack Repair: Epoxy Injection/Gravity Feed
1.3 References
Latest editions of the following standards:
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
ASTM C 1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for
Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.
FS (Federal Specification) TT -S -00227E (COM-NBS) - Interim Federal
Specification for Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi -Component (for
Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures.
FS (Federal Specification) TT -S -00230C - Interim Federal Specification for
Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Caulking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures.
FS (Federal Specification) TT -S-001543 (COM-NBS) - Interim Federal
Specification for Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures.
Canadian Specification CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87.
Canadian Specification CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90.
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
1.4 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, and laboratory test results that validate product
compliance with the requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall submit warranty information confirming that the
materials used will work as a compatible, warranted system.
C. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 5 -year warranty against
workmanship (contractor) and material failure (manufacturer).
1.5 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.6 Pre -Bid Inspection
The repair areas shown on the drawings or specified for repair are based on a
general survey. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to
determine the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include total
quantities of each repair type along with unit prices for quantities over or
below the engineering estimate.
1.7 Project Conditions
A. Do not use products under conditions of precipitation or freezing
weather. Use appropriate measures for protection and supplementary
heating to ensure proper curing conditions in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations if application during inclement
weather occurs.
B. Protect adjacent work from contamination due to mixing, handling, and
application of sealant.
C. Ensure substrate is dry.
1.8 Site Conditions
Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material placement
within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions as
uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to the engineer's
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions include but are not
limited to poor quality base concrete, severely corroded reinforcing steel,
random cracks and deep oil penetration.
1.9 Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1.10
A. Deliver products in original factory packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration date as
applicable. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.
B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage,
construction activity, precipitation and direct sunlight in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Condition products to approximately 60° to 70° F (16° to 21° C) for use
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Handle all products with appropriate precautions and care as stated on
the Material Safety Data Sheet.
Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The repair contractor shall have experience, training, and proficiency
specific to all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any concrete repair materials for observation or testing shall be borne
by the Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.5.
2.1 Sealants
A. Sealing Non -Structural Cracks in Concrete Members (Horizontal
Surfaces)
Sikaflex-1 C SL or 2C SL by Sika
MasterSeal SL1 or SL2 by Master Builders Solutions
Vulkem 45 by Tremco
Dymeric 240FC by Tremco
B. Horizontal/Vertical Concrete Surface Interface, Post Bases,
Sealing Non -Structural Cracks in Concrete Members (Vertical
Surfaces)
Sikaflex-la or —2c NS by Sika
MasterSeal NP 1, NP 2, or CR 105 by Master Builders Solutions
Dymonic FC by Tremco
Dymeric 240FC by Tremco
C. Fastener Sealing
Sikaflex-la or 2c NS by Sika
MasterSeal NP 1, NP 2, or CR 105 by Master Builders Solutions
Dymonic FC by Tremco
Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant (black) by Dow Corning
D. Expansion Joints
1. Polyurethanes
a. Vertical
Sikaflex-2c NS or -15 LM by Sika
MasterSeal NP 150 by Master Builders Solutions
Dymonic FC by Tremco
b. Horizontal
Sikaflex-2c SL, -15LM SL by Sika
MasterSeal NP100 by Master Builders Solutions
THC 900 or 901 by Tremco
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
E. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
1. Polyurethanes
Sikaflex-15 LM by Sika
MasterSeal NP150 Master Builders Solutions
Dymonic FC by Tremco
F. Joints Between Adjacent Precast Concrete Wall Panels
Sikaflex-2c NS or 15 LM (color match) by Sika
MasterSeal NP 100 (non color match), NP2 or NP 150 (color match) by
Master Builders Solutions
Dymonic FC (color match) by Tremco
2.2 Accessories
A. Joint Cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
substrates indicated.
B. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates,
conditions, and exposures indicated.
C. Soft Backer Rod: Non -gassing, reticulated closed -cell polyethylene
foam rod or other compatible non -waxing, non -extruding, non -staining
resilient material in dimension 25 percent to 50 percent wider than the
joint width as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for conditions
and exposures indicated.
D. Closed -Cell Backer Rod: Closed -cell polyethylene rod designed for
on -grade and/or below -grade applications.
E. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as
recommended by sealant manufacturer to prevent sealant contact
where it would be detrimental to sealant performance.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of the work, the contractor shall conduct a
meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work. Surface
preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing, placing and
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-5
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
finishing procedures, and site conditions shall be discussed with the engineer
prior to the beginning of the work.
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, material
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the contractor
and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.
3.2 Examination
The contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of
this section will be performed. The contractor shall verify conformance with
the manufacturer's requirements and report any unsatisfactory conditions in
writing to the engineer. The contractor shall not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.3 Testing
Prior to sealant application, a test area shall be used to verify (adhesion
testing) product performance requirements as listed above and as
documented in the manufacturer's technical information. The contractor shall
arrange to have the product manufacturer's representative visit the project
site to verify product suitability and performance for the various substrates
indicated.
3.4 Preparation
A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accordance with the sealant
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations except
where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces as required using cleaners approved
by the sealant manufacturer whether primers are required or not.
C. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical
methods, such as by cutting, grinding, and wire brushing, in manner
not damaging to surrounding surfaces. Remove paints from joint
surfaces except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer.
D. Remove loose debris, dust, dirt, algae, laitance, and/or any other
materials that will prohibit adequate sealant adhesion from the areas to
be repaired by vacuum, oil -free compressed air, or other appropriate
means.
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-6
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
E. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant
manufacturer for proper joint design using a blunt instrument. Fit
securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so
no displacement occurs during tooling. Avoid stretching or twisting
joint backer.
F. Provide bond -breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant
manufacturer, adhering strictly to the manufacturers installation
requirements.
G. Prime joint substrates where required. Use and apply primer
according to sealant manufacturers recommendations. Confine
primers to sealant bond surfaces. Do not allow spillage or migration
onto adjoining surfaces.
H. Taping: Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer
contact with adjoining surfaces that would be permanently stained or
otherwise damaged by such contact or the cleaning methods required
for removal. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.5 Application
A. Mixing: Follow the manufacturer's recommended procedures for
mixing (if applicable).
B. Apply materials immediately after joint preparation as per the
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install sealants to uniform cross-sectional shapes with depths relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
D. Tool sealants in a manner that forces sealant against the back of the
joint, ensures firm, full contact at joint interfaces, and leaves a finish
that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets,
and embedded impurities.
E. Gravity Feed Crack Repair: Surface seal the bottom side of the
structure with a non -sag sealant. Route a square -cut and prepare the
crack as per Section 3.3 above. Crack surfaces shall be dry. Apply
bond breaker tape or backer rod in the crack. Pour polyurethane
sealant into the square -cut notch until the crack is completely full.
Polyurethane sealant installation shall follow the manufacturer's written
instructions.
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-7
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 7 Specifications
3.6 Cleaning
A. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accordance with the sealant
and substrate manufacturer's recommendations as work progresses.
B. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and
from possible damage. Cut out, remove, and replace contaminated or
damaged sealants so that they are without contamination or damage at
time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANT/JOINT FILLERS 07920-8
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
SECTON 09221 - STUCCO REPAIR
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
required to repair, rehabilitate, or reconstruct stucco -finished surfaces.
Repairs shall be adequate to restore the stucco finish to its original
dimensions after proper surface preparation. The contractor shall repair all
stucco surfaces as indicated in the contract documents or as specified herein.
1.2 Related Sections
07920 Joint Sealant/Joint Fillers
1.3 References
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) — latest editions of the
following standards:
ASTM C 109 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars -- Modified.
ASTM C 348 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
ASTM C 413 Standard Test Method for Absorption of Chemical -
Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings
ASTM C 596 Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing
Portland Cement.
ASTM C 666 Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid
Freezing and Thawing.
ASTM C 806 Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Expansive
Cement Mortar.
ASTM C 847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath
ASTM C 878-87 Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Shrinkage
Compensating Concrete.
ASTM C 897 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job -Mixed
Portland Cement- Based Plasters
ASTM C 1032 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base
ASTM C 1042 Test Method for Bond Strength of Latex Systems used
with Concrete.
ASTM C 1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and
Furring for Portland Cement Plaster
ASTM C 1202 Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete's
Ability to Resistance to Chloride Ion Penetration.
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
ASTM D 1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
1.4 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, and laboratory test results that validate product
compliance with the requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall submit warranty information confirming that the
materials used will work as a compatible, warranted system.
C. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 5 -year warranty against workmanship
(contractor) and material failure (manufacturer).
1.5 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance.
1.6 Pre -Bid Inspection
The repair areas shown on the drawings or specified for repair are based on a
general survey. The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to
determine the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include total
quantities of each repair type along with unit prices for quantities over or
below the engineering estimate.
1.7 Environmental Conditions
Repair materials shall not be applied without protection in temperature below
45°F (7°C) nor when the temperature is expected to fall below 45°F (7°C)
during the curing period unless otherwise specified by the material
manufacturer. Repair material shall not be applied to frozen surfaces.
All materials used for the repair work must be VOC compliant. The
manufacturer shall supply the appropriate material safety data sheets upon
request.
1.8 Site Conditions
Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material placement
within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions as
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to the engineer's
attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions include but are not
limited to poor quality base concrete, severely corroded reinforcing steel,
random cracks and deep oil penetration.
1.9 Material Handling
The material shall be delivered in the original, unopened containers. It shall
be labeled with the manufacturer's name, product name, and lot number.
Store materials at the job site under dry conditions and at temperatures
between 50°F (10°C) and 90°F (32°C).
1.10 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The repair contractor shall have experience and proficiency specific to
all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any repair materials for observation or testing shall be borne by the
Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.5.
2.1 Portland Cement Stucco
MasterEmaco T 310 IL by Master Builders Solutions
MasterEmaco N 425 by Master Builders Solutions
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-3
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
Sto Skim Coat or Skim Coat Concentrate by Sto Corp.
Sto One Coat Stucco, Sto Acrylic One Coat Stucco, or Sto Leveler by Sto
Corp.
Verticoat or Verticoat Supreme by Euclid
2.2 Bonding Agent
MasterEmaco A660 by Master Builders Solutions
Flex -Con by Euclid
Sto Bonding Agent by Sto Corp.
2.3 Accessories
A. Moisture Barrier: vapor permeable asphalt saturated felt in compliance
with local building codes and ASTM D 226.
B. Lathe
1. Minimum No. 20 gauge 1 -inch (25 mm) self -furred galvanized
steel woven wire fabric in compliance with ASTM C 1032
2. Minimum 2.5 Ib./yd2 (1.4 kg/m2) self -furred galvanized steel
diamond mesh metal lath in compliance with ASTM C 847
C. Mechanical Fasteners: Appropriate non -corroding fasteners,
depending on the type of framing or substrate:
1. Wood Framing: minimum 11 -gauge, 7/16 -inch (11 mm)
diameter head galvanized roofing nails with minimum 3/ inch
(19mm) penetration into studs or minimum #8 Type S wafer
head fully threaded corrosion resistant screws with minimum 34
inch (19 mm) penetration into studs.
2. Steel Framing: minimum #8 Type S or S-12 wafer head fully
threaded corrosion resistant screws with minimum 3/8 -inch (9.5
mm) penetration into studs.
3. Concrete or Masonry: minimum # 8 wafer head fully threaded
corrosion resistant screws for masonry with minimum 1 -inch (25
mm) penetration into substrate.
D. Corner bead and miscellaneous joint accessories: All accessories shall
meet the requirements of ASTM C 1063 and its referenced documents:
1. PVC plastic in compliance with ASTM D 1784, cell classification
13244C.
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-4
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
All accessories shall have perforated or expanded flanges and shall be
designed with grounds for the specified thickness of stucco.
E. Water: clean and potable
F. Sand: Clean, well graded, and free of deleterious materials in
compliance with ASTM C 897.
2.4 Estimating
Refer to manufacturer's literature for material yields and coverages. Actual
usage will vary depending on the profile and planeness of the repair surface
and should be verified by the contractor. The contractor shall install the
material at the thicknesses specified herein, on drawings, or to match the
existing conditions and shall be familiar with site conditions to determine
appropriate material quantities.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Pre -Job Conference
At least 7 days prior to the start of repairs, the contractor shall conduct a
meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work. Surface
preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing, placing and
finishing procedures, and site conditions shall be discussed with the engineer
prior to the beginning of the work.
The contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties including
but not limited to the contractor's superintendent, repair contractor, material
supplier representative, and proposed equipment supplier representative.
Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the contractor
and distributed to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting.
3.2 Surface Preparation
A. Concrete
Concrete surfaces must be slightly scarified, water absorbent, straight
and true to line and plane. All oil, dirt, debris, paint, unsound substrate,
and other bond inhibiting materials must be removed. Pre -moisten
highly absorbent surfaces with water prior to placement of stucco. The
prepared substrate should be at, or slightly drier than, a saturated,
surface -dry (SSD) condition. The contractor shall follow all surface
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-5
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
preparation requirements set forth in the manufacturer's written
documentation.
B. Concrete Masonry Units
Remove projecting joint mortar so it is even with the plane of the wall.
Remove surface contaminants such as efflorescence, existing paint, or
any other bond inhibiting material by sandblasting, waterblasting, wire
brushing, chipping or other appropriate means. However, don't rake
out masonry mortar joints to provide a "key." Doing so will create
plaster of varying thickness, which can cause cracking. Pre -moisten
the surface just prior to placement of stucco or apply one uniform coat
of bonding agent by brush or roller. The prepared substrate should be
at, or slightly drier than, a saturated, surface -dry (SSD) condition.
C. Sheathing/Lathe
All oil, dirt, debris, paint, unsound substrate, and other bond inhibiting
materials must be removed. The contractor shall remove all rust from
existing metal lathe to remain. Corroded or otherwise damaged lath
should be cut out and replaced with a new section of lath conforming to
ASTM C 847. Lath should be lapped 13 mm (1/2 in.) at the sides and
25 mm (1 in.) at the ends (ASTM C 1063), with wire ties spaces 230
mm (9 in.) apart. If paper -backed lath is used, laps should be installed
to allow a paper -paper and lath -lath lap. Lath should not be continuous
at control joints. Anchor all new lath to studs at no more than 180 mm
(7 in.) on center, but avoid nailing the lath to the substrate between the
studs. Instead, wire -tie the new and existing lath.
D. Building Paper
If the existing building paper is torn, it should be replaced with new
paper that meets the requirements of UU-B-790a, Federal
Specifications for Building Paper. The new paper should be slipped
behind the existing paper at the top and sides and allow it to extend
over the old paper at an existing lap. Laps should be at least 100 mm
(4 in.).
3.3 Joints
Existing joints shall be maintained by forming at joint locations or sawcutting
over joint locations.
3.4 Installation
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-6
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
After the concrete surface has been prepared and cleaned, apply
epoxy/cement bonding agent or a brush coat of the repair mortar. The
contractor shall follow all surface preparation requirements set forth in the
manufacturer's written documentation.
A. Excavation
When patching plaster, each succeeding coat is cut back further than
the preceding coat, the base coat being the smallest area and the
finish coat being the largest area to be patched. If the plaster is
properly keyed into the lath, the lath may have to be cut as well. In
these cases, sound plaster at the patch perimeter will have to be
removed to make room for lapping the new and existing lath. When
patching the plaster, replace it in layers to the same thickness as the
existing plaster.
B. Mixing
All materials should be in the proper temperature range of 60°F (15°C)
to 90°F (32°C). Add the appropriate amount of water and acrylic
bonding agent admixture for the batch size and then add the dry
product. Refer to the manufacturer's technical data sheet for specific
mixing requirements.
C. Placing
Product should be placed in lifts as required by the product
manufacturer. Trowel into place and allow stiffening before the next
lift. Multiple lifts may be placed as long as the previous lift is well
textured. If additional lifts will be placed after the product has
hardened, score the surface, in one direction, of the previous lift to
provide for a secure bond for the next lift. Vertical wall surfaces should
be scored horizontally. After allowing the scratch coat to cure for at
least 24 hours, apply the brown coat at the same thickness as the
existing brown coat. Follow the same rules for applying the finish coat.
D. Finishing
Finish the repair area to the specified texture. Do not add additional
water to the surface during the finishing operation. If additional liquid is
required, use a finishing aid/evaporation retardant (submit product
technical data for engineer review prior to use). Unless otherwise
specified, repair surfaces shall receive a finish to match the
surrounding existing conditions.
E. Curing
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-7
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
Proper curing procedures are required to ensure the durability and
quality of the repair. Follow all of the manufacturer's curing
requirements as per the product's written technical data. Curing
procedures should maintain a relative humidity of 80% for at least 24
hours, and up to 7 days in some cases. The plaster can be moist -cured
by periodically applying a fine fog spray of water to the surface. But the
most practical curing method is to install plastic film around the
repaired area. Consider using an opaque film to protect the plaster
from sunlight. Place the film as soon as the plaster surface has
hardened enough to resist impression by contact with the film.
F. Clean-up
Clean tools and equipment with brush and water before the material
hardens.
END OF SECTION 09221
STUCCO REPAIR 09221-8
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
SECTON 09900 - PAINTING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials
as required in the attached Paint Coating Specification prepared by The
Sherwin Williams Company.
1.2 Related Sections
07920 Joint Sealant -Joint Fillers
09221 Stucco Repair
1.3 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product technical data,
specifications, and laboratory test results that validate product
compliance with the requirements for the project.
B. The Contractor shall submit warranty information confirming that the
materials used will work as a compatible, warranted system.
C. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Warranty stating that all
materials have been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Provide a 10 year warranty against
workmanship (contractor) and material failure (manufacturer).
1.4 Submittals for Substitution of Materials
All submittals for substitutions must be made in writing to the engineer with
supporting technical data sheets and test data showing complete equivalent
performance. Complete specifications prepared by the manufacturer shall be
submitted to the engineer.
1.5 Pre -Bid Inspection
The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to determine the extent
of the required work. Final bid shall include total quantities of each repair
type along with unit prices for quantities over or below the engineering
estimate.
PAINTING 09900-1
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
1.6 Site Conditions
Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material placement
within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions as
uncovered during the course of work shall be brought to the engineer's
attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions include but are not
limited to poor quality base substrate, severely corroded reinforcing steel,
random cracks, and deep oil penetration.
1.7 Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver products in original factory packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration date as
applicable. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.
B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage,
construction activity, precipitation and direct sunlight in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Handle all products with appropriate precautions and care as stated on
the Material Safety Data Sheet.
1.8 Quality Assurance
A. Contractor
The repair contractor shall have experience, training, and proficiency
specific to all work within this project.
B. Manufacturer Representative
The manufacturer shall be a company regularly engaged in the
manufacturing and marketing of the products specified in this section.
The manufacturer shall provide job service as required to assure
proper handling and installation of materials. The field representative
shall instruct as needed to assure that handling, mixing, placing and
finishing of materials are in accordance with specifications.
C. Engineer
All work and materials are subject to observation by the Engineer
and/or owner's representative. All work is subject to testing as deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The expense of removing and replacing
any concrete repair materials for observation or testing shall be borne
by the Contractor if deemed necessary by the Engineer or Owner.
PAINTING 09900-2
Project Manual - North Garden Avenue Parking Garage Restoration
Division 9 Specifications
2.0 PRODUCTS
Any material substitutions must be approved by the engineer in accordance
with Section 1.4.
Refer to the attached Paint Coating Specification prepared by The Sherwin
Williams Company.
3.0 EXECUTION
Refer to the attached Paint Coating Specification prepared by The Sherwin
Williams Company.
PAINTING 09900-3
1
i
INDEX AND TITLE PAGE
1.0 Scope of Work
2.0 Workmanship & Application Conditions
3.0 Owner Responsibilities & Payment Schedule
4.0 General Conditions
5.0 Materials
6.0 Colors
7.0 Surface Preparation
8.0 Caulking Procedures
9.0 Masonry/Stucco Repair Procedure
10.0
Inspection, Samples & Warranties
11$ Painting Schedule & Recommended System
3
1
1
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Work in general includes repairs/replacement of substrates herein listed, surface preparation for
painting and application of the paint coating to the substrates and systems outlined in this
specification. It is the intent of these specifications that surfaces outlined in section 11.0 be
proposed by bidding contractors as described. Any changes to the following must be approved
by the owner and manufacturer prior to commencing work.
Included
1. Building and Garage Exterior Wall surfaces (Masonry, Stucco, Block) and Garage
Perimeter Columns All 4 sides
2. Service Doors
3. Non -Ferrous Metal Trim, Vents, Gutters, Downspouts, etc.
4. Ferrous Metal - Black Metal
5. Store Front Entry, Window Frames
6. Louver Panels*
Excluded
1. All Substrates not included in this specification
2. Light Fixtures
3. Parking Bumpels and Stripes
4. Parking Deck
5. Horizontal Top Skde Surface of Walkways
1.2 PRE-BID CONFERENCE 11
A pre-bid conference of II intended bidders, owner's representative(s), project
attached specifiers (i.e., engineer or architect) and Sherwin Williams
representative(s) to review specifications, owner's final scope of work and establish
project requirements of all parties involved.
4
1
1
1
1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator: Company specializing in exterior waterproofing, commercial,
residential, multi -story and multi -family painting.
Submit with bid a minimum of five references of successfully completed
projects of similar magnitude and complexity, to include
BUILDING/COMPLEX NAME:
BUILDING ADDRESS:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
BUILDING/RESIDENT MANAGER:
BOARD MEMBER OR OFFICER:
EXTERIOR FINISH COATING SYSTEM:
5
2.0 WORKMANSHIP AND APPLICATION CONDITIONS
2.1 Paint only in dry weather when temperature is 50°F or higher. Stop exterior work early
enough to permit paint film to set up before condensation occurs (caused by
night temperature drops)ADo not begin painting until surfaces are moisture free. 35°F for
masonry finish systems an c two hours before any rain/condensation is expected.
2.2 Keep paint at room temperature.
2.3 Keep dust, dirt and debris away from work before and during painting.
2.4 Execute work in accordance with label directions. Coating application shall be
made in strict conformance to this specification and to the manufacturer's
instructions on the product labels and product data sheets.
2.5 All work shall be conducted between the hours of 8:00 A.M and 5:00 P.M. Monday
through Friday.
2.6 All materials shall be applied evenly, free of runs and sages, by brush/roll
or airless sjray application. Airless spray application to masonry substrates must be
back-rolle with a wet roller to achieve proper Dry Film Thickness (DFT) and complete
color coverage.
2.7 Only the manufacturer's thinners/reducers may be used to thin the respective products
and only in the amounts prescribed.
2.8 All shrubbery, landscaping, outside carpeting and sprinkler systems shall be fully
protected agiaiiist damage during each stage of the painting project.
2.9 All substrates/sgkfaces/items not designated to receive paincoatings shall be kept free of
paint residue ate over pray, e.g. windows, walkways, driv$ways, floors, patio level
awnings, fire a*arms, spr7rilller system boxes arid any exposed electrical equipment.
� r
2.10 Owner will provide water end electricity from existin fa4ilities.
2.11 Normal safety signs, necesary lighting and temporary fencing around work areas
shall be installed and maintained and work performed in accordance with OSHA
requirements while the job is in progress.
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.0 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES AND PAYMENT SCHEDULE
3.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Owner as instructed by the contractor to perform any
trimming or pruning of foliage necessary to prevent any problems with the requirements
of the coating work. The Owners shall be responsible to remove or protect loose objects
in the work area that are not\included in this scope of work. If such items are not
removed, the contractor shall exercise due diligence to protect any such items,
but will not be responsible for any damages. The Owner shall be responsible for providing
proper parking spaces for vehicles, and equipment necessary to complete all work.
3.2 Owner will provide watelr and electricity from existing facilities for the preparation of
materials and equipment necessary to complete the work.
3.3 Owner will supply a designated area where equipment and materials may be kept. It will
be the contractor's responsibility to store these items in a safe, secure manner. Any
materials or equipment stored on the property will be the responsibility of the contractor,
the owner or q'wner's representatives have no liabilities for anything that is lost,
stolen or darxiaged while on site.
3.4 Payment driw schedule will be arranged between the owner's representative and
painting contractor.
3.5 Sherwin Williams will be provided a copy of the schedule and notification of payments
by the owner. Sherwin Williams will set up an account specific to this project. Upon
each draw, Sherwin Williams shall receive payment toward the account balance and
will, in returp, issue a "Partial Release of Lien" from the supplier.
•
7
4.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.1 A partial waiver of lien is to be submitted from the painting contractor and paint supplier
prior to or in exchange for each draw, a final wavier of lien will be supplied upon final
payment.
4.2 Contractor is to furnish any licenses and permits required by City and County.
4.3 A progress schedule shall be, furnished by the contractor to the Owner or the
Owner's agent for approval and shall be based on the contract completion date.
Contractor shall advise tie Owner or Owner's agent of those areas in which work
is to be performed sufficiently in advance of the work schedule to permit the Owner
to prepare for the work, advise employees, move vehicles, etc.
4.4 Painting contractor agrees to not sub -contract or assign any portion of this work
without the Owner's and Sherwin Williams's approval. Any request to use sub -contractors
will be submitted in writing to both parties. It is to include the sub -contractors business
name, licensF; insurance info (to meet project requirements), qualifications and
what the scope of work the sub -contractor will be performing. If any subcontractor
performs wprk on the project without proceeding as directed all work performed will
be subject to being re -done at the Owner's and Sherwin Williams's direction at the
contractor's expense.
4.5 Contractors shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in each phase of
work herein stated. Contractors shall supply a minimum of seven (7) references,
complete with,names, addresses and telephone numbers of equal type projects that
have been cbnipleted. Include recent, past and any current'projects being performed.
4.6 All work shall be' accomplished by continuous skilled workmen familiar with and trained
to do this type_of work' nd they shall be further qualified to/operate or use the
equipment or rigging needed to accomplish -This work. A sq(e project manager and a
designated onsitie foreman wi11 be assigned at the start of the project and remain in place
until completiok � I; 1;=). ti
4.7 Contractor is to include copies of current insurance certificates for both general liability
$1,000,000 and workers compensation $500,000 or as otherwise designated by the owner
or owner's representative.
8
5.0 MATERIALS
5.1 All materials used in this paint specification/project shall be
delivered to the job in original, sealed containers by The Sherwin
Williams Company (S -W).
5.2 All materials shall be used according to label directions and applied at package
consistency
5.3 All products specified are manufactured and distributed by The Sherwin
Williams Company this includes coatings, sealers, sealants and concrete
repair/patching materials. The importance of this is that a sole source warranty
will be issued to the owner, leaving
solely The Sherwin Williams Company liable for the warranty period.
6.0 COLORS
6.1 Colors/ o be approved by owner or owner's representative. Specifications are
prepared with the intent colors will be re-applied as they exist.
6.2 The owner and project coordinator should be aware that certain colors,
especially darker tones, fade more rapidly than other colors, regardless of the
product manufacturer, product type, or substrate to which the product is
applied. It is advisable for the owner, project coordinator, and/or person
responsible for color selection to consult with Sherwin-Williams early in the
plannipg,stages to assure the most durable combinat'on of tinting formulation
is used to achieve the desired color. Additionally, cot r selection affects the
hiding abiljtyof finish coats. The specification is'writ en intending for the
finish coati to c000 r.
r
II
9
7.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
7.1 GENERAL
All surfaces to be painted.shall be cleaned and prepared as specified. The painting contractor
is responsible for the finishf his work. Should any surface be found unsuitable to produce a
proper paint or sealant finis1, the Owner or Owner's agent shall be notified, in writing, and no
materials shall be applied until -the unsuitable surfaces have been made satisfactory. Coating
performance is affected by proper product selection, application, and surface preparation.
Coating integrity and service life will be reduced because of improperly prepared surfaces.
The selection and implementation of proper surface preparation ensures coating
adhesion to the substratand prolongs the service life of the coating system.
7.2 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES
Maintenance painting will frequently not permit or require complete removal of all old
coatings prior to repainting. However, ALL surface contamination such as oil, grease,
loose and marginally adhering paint, mill scale, dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew,
mortar, efflorescence and sealers must be removed to assure sound bonding to the
tightly adherjing old paint. In addition, glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean
and dull bef¢re repainting. Spot prime all bare areas with the appropriate primer.
Recognize that any surface preparation short of total removal of the old coatings
may compromise the service length of the system. Always check for compatibility
of the previously painted surface with the new coating by applying a test patch of
2-3 square feet. Allow to dry thoroughly, check adhesion.
Compatibility of the existing coatings and what specified isl1letermined acceptable
since supplied by* same manufacture, The Sherwin Willi s Company. This allows
the owner to have' a 'single source responsible party to .determ ne any failures of either
the existing coat hg system or what specified herein.
7.3 CLEANING & frIILDEW (CONTROL
All exterior surfaces must lie thoroughly pressure clehried Using a pressure washer at
2500 PSI and a 15 degree tip. held no more than 12" from the surface to insure the surface
is cleaned free of all loose, scaling, and marginally adhering paint, all chalk, mildew,
stains, dirt, grease or other foreign material. Surface must be firm, clean and dry before
_proceeding. All loose and scaling paint not removed by pressure cleaning shall be
removed by wfe brushing or other suitable power tool cleaniig.
Remove mildew using a solution of chlorine bleach d water mixed to a ratio of 1
part chlorine' bleach and 3 partts water. Taking extrem cafe not to get solution on
adjacent vegetation. Allow solution to remain on the s ace for
10minutes beford rin____sing tho oughly with clean wate UTiON: DO
NOT ADD HOUSEHOLD DETERGENTS OR AMMONIA TO THE BLEACH
SOLUTION. Wear protective glasses or goggles, waterproof gloves, and
protective clothing. Quickly; wash off with soap and cleany water any solution that touches
the skin. Wet any thrubberyyin the area where cleaning prior to use of any bleach and
water mixture rine completely= after area cleaned.
t �.
10
7.0 SURFACE PREPARATION -Continued
Remove grease, oil and stubborn airborne contaminants using a degreasing agent by apply
to the affected area by pump up sprayer allowing to sit as described by manufacturer,
typically 10 minutes and ekeaning as adjacentareas.
7.4 RUSTED/FLAKING MET4 SURFACES/DOORS
, -
Hand Tool clean rusty areas per SSPC-SP2 or Power Tool clean per SSPC-SP3. Surface
must be clean, dry and sound. Spot prime cleaned rusted/peeling areas with specified
primer the same day as prepared.
If Doors are in good shape structurally, refer to section 7.3 for surface prep.
7.5 PREVIOUSLY PAINTED EXTERIOR MASONRY, CONCRETE, OR STUCCO
A. Rust Stains: From sprinkler systems, if any: Remove stains with rust stain
remover. Rinse and let dry.
From imbedded iron deposits, if any:
1. Chip, drill or chisel out.
2. Treat stain with oxalic acid.
3. Seal with surface conditioner.
4. Fill with patching compound, blending with adjacent surfaces.
f ,t
B. Deterioratingstucco areas less than 2 square inches in. size and 1/4" deep:
1. Refer tO Specification 09921 in the Project Manua�
2. Sound,+out and rerrlove leose_stuceo.
ET
3. Seal With surface;'conditioner.
4. Fill with patching compound blending with adjacent surfaces.
C. Deteriorating stucco areas greater than 2" square in size and 1/4" deep:
1. Refer to Specification 09921 in the Project Manual
2. Sou id cult and remove loose stucco.
3. Prime substrate with appropriate surface co ditioner.
4. Replace with new s�iucco and blend with ad' cent surfaces.
5. After proper cure time, seal with surface conditioner.
11
7.0 SURFACE PREPARATION -Continued
7.6 ALUMINUM
�1\
1. After pressure washing, mildew.. treatment and chloride (salts) removal, remaining
oxidized or deteriorated aluminum coatings will be removed by power tool sanding.
2. Lightly sand to remove existing gloss and ensure primary bond of the Sherwin Williams
coatings system.
3. Remove all sanding residuals. Clean all surfaces to be painted by solvent wiping with
approved solvent compatible with specified system and allow to dry prior to any other
procedure.
4. Prime any bare aluminum.
7.7 GALVANISED METAL
1. After pressure washing, mildew treatment and removal of chloride (salts) residue,
remaining oxidized or deteriorated coating will be removed by power tool sanding or wire
brushing.
2. Lightly sand to remove existing gloss and ensure primarx bond of the Sherwin Williams
1.
coatings system. `I ,
•
3. Clean all surfabes to be .painted by solvent wiping with approved solvent
compatible with "specified sstem-and-allow to dry prior to piny other
procedure. Rembve all sanding residuals. �'
4. Prime any bare galvanized metal. Convert any rust — sees"Ferrous Metals."
12
7.0 SURFACE PREPARATION -Continued
7.8 FERROUS METAL
1. After pressure washing, mildew treatment and chloride (salts) removal, ferrous metals
will be solvent cleaned in accordance with the Society of Protective Coatings Standard,
SSPC SP -1. Change cleaning rags often.
Dispose of all rags in accordance with local, state and EPA regulations.
2. Any existing rust or loose and failed coatings will be removed by conscientious hand and
power tool cleaning, according to SSPC-SP2/3. Hand or power sand all existing gloss
surfaces in order to promote the adhesion of the specified primer/finish. Remove all sanding
residuals.
3. All residue produced by grinding and chipping will be completely removed from the
surface and surrounding area prior to any other procedure.
4. Any area that presents difficulty in reaching will be treated with the specified rust
conversion primer, applied by label direction. Rust must be present for the converter to
perform as formulated by converting ferrous oxide (rust) to a stable iron complex.
13
8.0 SEALANT PROCEDURES
8.1 Install Sherwin Williams Loxon H1 sealant at all specified transitions of the building's
exterior wall envelope to.protect from air and moisture infiltration. All sealants to be
removed and replaced except as noted in the Project Manual. Remove and replace
according to SWRI (Sealan Waterproofing Restoration Institute).
8.2 Install specified sealant Sherwin Williams Loxon H1 SEALANT at all areas where existing
sealant is present, and to all transitions where they have been omitted previously, unless
specifically excluded by Owner or Owner's representative in writing. This includes, but is
not limited to: door, window and fixture penetrations and perimeters; windowsills, joints
and perimeters of decorative stucco bands, quoins, joints at wall to wall (i.e., inside corners
created by changes in direction of joining surfaces); flashing details; control joints and
between separating dissimilar materials at expansion joints, etc.; and work provided by
others including attachments or intrusions when penetrating exterior coating system (i.e.,
downspouts, screen enclosures, railings attached to sidewalls, etc.). Sealant installed over
existing sealant is strictly forbidden.
Exception: Refer to Specification 07920 and the Project Manual for installation of the joint
sealant at interior surfaces/areas of parking garage concrete structure.
8.3 Prior to sealant application:
Remove sealant with a caulk cutter only using caution not to damage the substrate
and brush clean all residuals. Dispose of all cleaning residuals/old sealant, etc. in
accordance with all local and state EPA/city/county requirements.
Seal stucco with surface conditioner and allow to dry.
Fit with backer rod or bond breaker (where necessary to control maximum depth of/2"
and/or to prevent three (3) sided a esion.
8.4 Install specified sealant. Sealant must be installed according to the manufacturer's
directions. All sealant must be Installed to maintain the proper width to depth ratio. All
sealant will maintain a minimum of Y2" width and have a minimum of /4" intimate contact
with the prepared substrate(s).
8.5 ' Ali sealant will be no more than Y2" in depth, and no more than }" in yvidth except for
multi-component high- perrforrmancsealant. Tiansitions that have an cipated„ movement
or where sealant depth may exceell Y2" )yill hale bond breaker tape r bac er zod installed
to prevent three: -(3) sided adhesign:.
14
9.0 MASONRY/STUCCO REPAIR PROCEDURE
9.1 Sound all cracks to determine if there is a bond to the substrate. If
hollow sound or disbondirig is present, repair according to specification 09921 and 03720
in the Project Manual. Loose substrate must be removed. Finish to match the adjacent
substrate in texture and unifoity.
9.2 HAIRLINE OR SHRINKAGE CRACKS (1/32" or smaller)
Coat affected area by applying one coat of Sherwin-Williams Loxon Masonry
Acrylic Primer (A24W83I00) at 8.0 wet mils.
9.3 HAIRLINE OR SHRINKAGE CRACKS (1/32" to 1/16")
Apply Sherwin-Williams' Concrete & Masonry Patching Compound Brush Grade Textured
(WL700GLTB) generously over the center of the crack. Use a broad knife or a brush and
"feather" the material to either side of the crack so as to go from 1/16" to 0, over a 2" area.
9.4 LARGE CRACKS (1/16" up to 1/4")
Refer to Project Manual crack repair specifications.
Do not attempt to repair cracks caused by structural deficiencies in the building per
this specification. Notify engineer immediately if such cracks are discovered.
9.5 Newly Placed Stucco
Newly placed stuueo - All new stucco will have a finish as onsistent as possible with
surrounding stuccP't xture or as specified. Note: All new stco must dry for a minimum of
3 days and have l'l pH les*. than 13. All new stucco with a pHi' 13 and less may be primed
with Loxon Concrete and Masonry_Primer apptied at 6 wet nils to achieve 2 dry mils. After
primer has dried„ topcoat with Loxon Self Cleaning.
Note: Obtain a pH reading With pH Pencil; to be conducted' prior to any application of
Concrete and Masonry Primer=
15
10.0 INSPECTION, SAMPLES, WARRANTIES & FINISH SCHEDULE
10.1 Wet film thickness will be checked with a properly calibrated Wet Film Thickness Gauge or
by specifically approved instruments by a Sherwin Williams representative on a bi-weekly
basis. Areas will be chosenrandom and measured to ensure conformance to the project
specific specification.
10.2 It will be the paint contractor's responsibility to own and use a wet film gauge
to check the application thickness as the painting proceeds. This method checked against
volume solids and coverage rate is the best guide in determining what the dry film thickness
will be.
10.3 A small sample area of each phase of the work shall be done and checked by
a project representative and Sherwin Williams representative. This will serve upon
acceptance as the job standard for the remainder of that phase of work. This will also prevent
misunderstandings as to interpretation of this specification's standards.
10.4 Upon completion following the project specification and approved site visit reports by
Sherwin Williams, materials applied to masonry substrates will be warranted for both
material and/labor will be warranted for a (Years) (10) as described
on the attached sample warranty.
10.5 Coatings should be applied based on specified wet mil film thicknesses to achieve suggested
dry film thicknesses. Spread rates available on Sherwin Williams product technical data sheets
and product labels should be used as a guideline for material estimates. Given the available
data, it is the responsibility of the applicator to determine spread rates based on surface
textures, profiles of d porosity after required preparation. Thecontractor shall also be
responsible for determiuing the number of finish coats to provide satisfactory hide and
coverage without Oompromising the finish and performance characteristics of the products.
Sherwin Williams shall not 130 held -responsible for any quantity estimates. WET FILM
GAUGES MUS1 BE USED,/
I5 ,5 '3
i
Note: Sherwin Williams representatives will conduct random site visits to review work
performed, performing and make recommendations as to any repairs/re-work. A site visit
report at that time will be completed noting the work area, what was being performed,
hat it conforms to specification or that it does not and any corrective measures needed.
Any corrective measures noted in the site visit report v i11 be the sole responsibility of the
contractor Copies will be Supplied to the owner, owner's representative and contractor.
Warranty: At end of project a 10 -year warranty will be issued for all vertical masonry
16
11.0 PAINTING SCHEDULE & RECOMMENDED SYSTEM
11.1 Exterior Previously Painted; uilding/Garage and Garage Perimeter Columns (4 sides)
Pretreatment: Pressure Clean, fungicide & rinse clean (minimum 2500 PSI)
Pretreatment: Remove all loose, flaking and bubbled paint, feather edges to hide transition
and blend texture to match asclose as possible
FLAT PAINT SYSTEM: SELF CLEANING SYSTEM
First Coat: Sherwin-Williams (S -W) Loxon Conditioner Clear (A24V100) at
a spread rate of 200 — 300 square feet per gallon. Spread rate will
vary due to the texture and porosity of the substrate.
Second Coat: Sherwin Williams (S -W) Loxon Self Cleaning Flat Acrylic
,' (LX 13 W0051) at 6 wet mils, 2.5 mils dry.
Note: On n4 stucco areas be sure that the stucco has a pH level of 6 to 13
before applying Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer.
11.2 Service Door & Frames
Pretreatment: Pressure Clean, fungicide & rinse clean (minimum 2500 PSI)
Pretreatment: Remove all loose, flaking and bubbled paint and feather sand edges
Pretreatment:; Scuff Sand and Solvent Wipe with Denatured Alcohol
Pretreatment: Pride all tight rust and bare metal with S/W' em Kromik Primer (B5OWZ1)
NOTE: ALL SER V1QE DOORS AND TRIM MUST: BE SOUFF SANDED IN ORDER TO
ACHIEVE PROPER PROFILE FOR PROPER ADHESIOl
First Coat: Oherwin Wq1iams Kem Kromik Universal 'rimer (B5OWZ1) at a spread rate
of 300 square felt per gallon, applied at 6 wet mils 'd,;athive 2 dry mils, primer must be
opaque in coverage
Second Coat: Sherwin Williams Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel (B54W151) applied at a
spread rate of 300 square feet per gallon, applied at 6 wet mils to achieve 2 dry mils
17
11.3 Non Ferrous Previously Painted Metal Trim, Vents, Gutters, Downspouts
Pretreatment: Pressure C1e , fungicide & rinse clean (minimum 2500 PSI)
Pretreatment: Remove all to e,. flaking and bubbled paint
Pretreatment: Check surface for dampness prior to priming and painting
FLAT PAINT SYSTEM.
First Coat: Sherwin-Williams (S -W) Loxon Conditioner Clear (A24V 100) at
a spread rate of 200 — 300 square feet per gallon. Spread rate will
vary due to the texture and porosity of the substrate.
Second Coat: Sherwin Williams (S -W) Loxon Self Cleaning Flat Acrylic
(,X13 W0051) at 6 wet mils, 2.5 mils dry.
11.0p PAINTING SCHEDULE & RECOMMENDED SYSTEM (Continued)
11.4 Ferrous Metals — Black Metal
Pretreatment: Pressure Clean, fungicide & rinse clean (minimum 2500 PSI)
Pretreatment: Remove all loose, flaking and bubbled paint, feather edges
Pretreatment:i Prime all tight rust and bare metal with S/W\Kem Kromik Primer (B5OWZ1)
First Coat: Shgrwin Williams Industrial Urethane Alkyd'Hamel (B54W151)
_applied al—spread rate of 300 square feet ped' gallon, applied at 6
wet mils to a4hieve-2 dry-mils-
Second
ry-milsSecond Coat: Sherwin Williams Industrial Uretharie Alkyls Enamel (B54W151)
applied at a read rate of 300 square feet per gallon, applied at 6
wet mils to achieve 2 dry mils
11.5 Store Front Entry, Window Frames, Slider Frames and Louver Panel Units
Pretreatment: 'Pressure -Clean, fungicide & rinse clan (low pressure 1250 PSI)
Pretreatment: , Ren}bve all loose, flaking and bubbled paint'
NOTE: ALL SMOOTH SURFACES TO BE SCUFF ANDED TO ACHIEVE PROPER
PROFILE IN ORDER TO A IEVE PROPER`'ADH SION
I
First Coat: Sherwin-Williams (S -W) Bond-Plex (B71T204) at a spread rate of
200 — 300 square feet per gallon. Spread rate will vary due to the
texture and porosity of the substrate.
Second Coat: Sherwin Williams (S -W) Bond-Plex071T264) at a spread rate of
200 - 300 square feet per gallon: Spread rate will vary due to the
tekture and liorosity of the substrate.
1
L I -
18
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS
GREENGUARD
PRODUCT CERTIFIED FOR
LOW CHEMICAL EMISSIONS
LH-COM/GO
UL 2818
As of 12/07/2015. Complies with:
OTC Yes
LEED® 09 CI Yes
SCAQMD Yes
LEED® 09 NC Yes
CARB Yes
LEE® 09CS Yes
GARB SCM 2007 Yes
LEED®H Yes
MPI NGBS
Yes
GOLD
108.20A
LoxoN®
Conditioner
A24W01100 Guide Coat White
A24V01100 Clear
CHARACTERISTICS
Loxon Conditioner is a 100% acrylic
emulsion conditioner that will penetrate
and seal interior and exterior surfaces
and bond light chalk to the surface. With
excellent alkali and efflorescence
resistance, this sealer allows new
concrete, stucco, and other cementitious
surfaces to be coated prior to a 30 -day
cure, and will adhere to new or existing
concrete with a pH of 6 to 13.
Color: Guide -Coat White & Clear
Coverage: 200-300 sq ft/gal
Drying Time, @ 77°F, 50% RH:
Drying and recoat times are temperature, humidity
and film thickness dependent.
Touch: 30 minutes
Tack free: 1 hour
Recoat: 3 hours
Flash Point: N/A
Tinting with CCE:
Requires ColorCast Ecotoner colorant for
tinting. If desired, up to 1 oz per gallon of
ColorCast Ecotoner colorant can be used
to approximate the topcoat color. Check
color before use.
Vehicle Type: Proprietary Acrylic
Guide Coat White A24W01100
VOC (less exempt solvents):
<50 g/L; <0.42 Ib/gal
As per 40 CFR 59.406 and SOR/2009-264, s.12
White
Volume Solids: 18 ± 2%
Weight Solids: 24 ± 2%
Weight per Gal: 8.92 Ib
Clear A24V01100
VOC (less exempt solvents):
<50 g/L; <0.42 Ib/gal
As per 40 CFR 59.406 and SOR/2009-264, s.12
Clear
Volume Solids: 16 ± 2%
Weight Solids: 17 ± 2%
Weight per Gal: 8.44 Ib
SPECIFICATION
Masonry, Concrete, Stucco, Block
1 ct. Loxon Conditioner
2 cts. Appropriate architectural topcoat
For maximum resistance to
efflorescence, you must topcoat with one
of the Loxon or Loxon XP Coatings.
On exterior applications, Loxon
Conditioner must be topcoated within 7
days or the surface may need to be re-
cleaned.
If the surface requires a full bodied prime
/block filler coat rather than a thin
penetrating sealer, use Loxon Concrete &
Masonry Primer or Loxon Block Surfacer.
For use on these surfaces:
• Concrete
• Concrete Block
• Brick
• Stucco
• Fiber Cement Siding
• Mortar
• EIFS Exterior Wall Cladding
SURFACE PREPARATION
WARNING! Removal of old paint by
sanding, scraping or other means may
generate dust or fumes that contain lead.
Exposure to lead dust or fumes may
cause brain damage or other adverse
health effects, especially in children or
pregnant women. Controlling exposure to
lead or other hazardous substances
requires the use of proper protective
equipment, such as a properly fitted
respirator (NIOSH approved) and proper
containment and cleanup. For more
information, call the National Lead
Information Center at 1 -800 -424 -LEAD
(in US) or contact your local health
authority.
New and Previously Painted
Remove all surface contamination
(peeling paint, heavy chalk,
efflorescence, laitance, concrete dust,
etc.) by washing or pressure washing
with an appropriate cleaner, rinse
thoroughly and allow to dry. Existing
peeled or checked paint should be
scraped and sanded to a sound surface.
Recognize that any surface preparation
short of total removal of the old coating
may compromise the service length of
the system.
Masonry/Concrete/Stucco & Block
Remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose
particles, laitance, foreign material, and
form release and curing agents. Concrete
and mortar must be cured at least 7 days
at 75°F. Fill bugholes, air pockets, cracks,
and other voids with an elastomeric patch
or sealant. Masonry surfaces must be
dry, 15% or less of water and within a pH
range of 6 to 13.
Brick
Must be free of dirt, loose and excess
mortar, and foreign material. All brick
should be allowed to weather for at least
one year followed by wire brushing to
remove efflorescence. Treat the bare
brick with one coat of Loxon Conditioner.
12/2015
www.sherwin-williams.com
continued on back
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS
108.20A
LOXON®
Conditioner
A24W01100 Guide Coat White
A24V01100 Clear
SURFACE PREPARATION
Mildew
Prior to attempting to remove mildew, it is
always recommended to test any cleaner
on a small, inconspicuous area prior to
use. Bleach and bleaching type cleaners
may damage or discolor existing paint
films. Bleach alternative cleaning
solutions may be advised.
Mildew may be removed before painting
by washing with a solution of 1 part liquid
bleach and 3 parts water. Apply the
solution and scrub the mildewed area.
Allow the solution to remain on the
surface for 10 minutes. Rinse thoroughly
with water and allow the surface to dry
before painting. Wear protective eyewear,
waterproof gloves, and protective
clothing. Quickly wash off any of the
mixture that comes in contact with your
skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia
to the bleach/water solution.
APPLICATION
Do not build a surface glaze.
Do not apply to a damp surface.
Do not apply over heavy chalk.
Do not apply if the surface temperature is
below 50°F, when rain is expected within
3 hours, or when the relative humidity is
90% or more.
No reduction necessary.
Brush
Use a nylon/polyester or foam brush.
Roller
Use a 3/8" to 3/4" nap synthetic cover.
Spray—Airless
Pressure 700-1000 psi
Tip .015" - .019"
CLEANUP INFORMATION
Clean spills, spatters, hands and tools
immediately with soap and warm water.
After cleaning, flush spray equipment with
compliant cleanup solvent to prevent
rusting of the equipment. Follow
manufacturer's safety recommendations
when using solvents.
CAUTIONS
Protect from freezing.
Not for use on floors.
Use only with adequate ventilation. To avoid
overexposure, open windows and doors or use other
means to ensure fresh air entry during application
and drying. If you experience eye watering,
headaches, or dizziness, increase fresh air, or wear
respiratory protection (NIOSH approved) or leave the
area. Avoid contact with eyes and skin. Wash hands
after using. Keep container closed when not in use.
Do not transfer contents to other containers for
storage. FIRST AID: In case of eye contact, flush
thoroughly with large amounts of water. Get medical
attention if irritation persists. If swallowed, call Poison
Control Center, hospital emergency room, or
physician immediately. WARNING: This product
contains chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. DO NOT TAKE INTERNALLY. KEEP OUT OF
THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
HOTW 12/07/2015 A24W01100 09 00
SP, FRC
The information and recommendations set forth in
this Product Data Sheet are based upon tests
conducted by or on behalf of The Sherwin-Williams
Company. Such information and recommendations
set forth herein are subject to change and pertain to
the product offered at the time of publication. Consult
your Sherwin-Williams representative or visit
www.paintdocs.com to obtain the most current
version of the PDS and/or an SDS.
SHERWIN
VVILLIAMS.
As of 01/22/901 . Complies with:
OTC Yes
LEED®09CI N/A
OTC Phase II Yes
LEED® 09NC N/A
SCAQMD Yes
LEED®09CS N/A
CARE Yes
LEED® v4 Emissions N/A
GARB SCM2007 Yes
LEED®v4 VOC Yes
Canada Yes
MPI
LoxoN®
SELF-CLEANING ACRYLIC COATING
LX13W0051 Extra White
LX13W0053 Deep Base
LX13T0054 Ultradeep Base
LX13Y0056 Light Yellow
CHARACTERISTICS
Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating is
specifically engineered for exterior, above -
grade, masonry surfaces requiring a clean and
attractive look while providing high
performance protection with enhanced water
shedding and dirt pick-up resistant properties.
This may be applied to a surface with a pH of 6
to 13.
Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating is
formulated to be self-cleaning by shedding dirt
upon rain or water contact.
Key Attributes and Benefits:
• Excellent dirt pick up resistance
• Excellent water shedding
• Resistant to wind driven rain
• Hydrophobic characteristics
• Adhesion to multiple concrete surfaces,
wood and EIFS
• Highly alkali and efflorescence resistant
• Apply directly to fresh concrete (at least 7
days old)
• Can be applied down to 35°F
Color: Many colors
Coverage: 200-300 sq ft/gal
@ 5-7 mils wet; 2.1-2.9 mils dry
Coverage on porous & rough stucco 125 square feet
per gallon
Drying Time, @ 77°F, 50% RH:
Touch: 4 hours
Recoat: 24 hours
No maximum recoat time. Drying and recoat times
are temperature, humidity, and film thickness
dependent.
Finish:
Tinting with CCE:
Base oz/gal
Extra White 0-7
Deep Base 4-12
Ultradeep Base 10-12
0-10 units @ 85°
Strength
SherColor
SherColor
SherColor
Light Yellow 0-12 SherColor
Extra White LX13W0051
(may vary by base)
VOC (less exempt solvents):
<50 g/L; <0.42 Ib/gal
As per 40 CFR 59.406 and SOR/2009-264, s.12
Volume Solids:
42 ± 2%
Weight Solids: 57 ± 2%
Weight per Gallon: 11.37 Ib
Flash Point: N/A
Vehicle Type: 100% Acrylic
Mildew Resistant
This coating contains agents which inhibit the growth
of mildew on the surface of this coating film.
SPECIFICATIONS
Concrete, Masonry, Stucco
Self -prime using 2cts. of Loxon Self -Cleaning
Or
1ct. Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer
2cts. Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating
CMU, Block, Split -face Block
1 ct. Loxon Acrylic Block Surfacer
Or Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Block Filler
2 cts. Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating
Spray and backroll on porous & rough stucco
to achieve required film build and a pin-hole
free surface.
For porous block a coat of Loxon Block
Surfacer is required to achieve a pinhole free
surface.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
LX13W0051
Wind -Driven Rain Test Passes
Based on ASTM D6904-03
2cts Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating at
4.2 mils dft/ct
Water Vapor Permeance 22 perms
Based on ASTM D1653
1 ct Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating at
4.2 mils dft,
14 day cure @77°F&50%RH
Elongation
ASTM D2370
1 ct Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating at
4.3 mils dft,
14 day cure @ 77°F & 50% RH
Tensile Strength 310 psi
ASTM D2370
1 ct Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic Coating at
4.3 mils dft,
14 day cure @ 77°F & 50% RH
Flexibility Passes
ASTM D522- Method B, 180° bend,
1/8" mandrel
Alkali Resistance Passes
Based on ASTM D1308
Mildew Resistance Passes
ASTM D3273/D3274
Efflorescence 10
ASTM D7072-04
Shelf Life: 36 months unopened
55%
SURFACE PREPARATION
WARNING! Removal of old paint by
sanding, scraping or other means may
generate dust or fumes that contain lead.
Exposure to lead dust or fumes may
cause brain damage or other adverse
health effects, especially in children or
pregnant women. Controlling exposure to
lead or other hazardous substances
requires the use of proper protective
equipment, such as a properly fitted
respirator (NIOSH approved) and proper
containment and cleanup. For more
information, call the National Lead
Information Center at 1 -800 -424 -LEAD
(in US) or contact your local health
authority.
Remove all surface contamination by
washing with an appropriate cleaner,
rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. Scrape
and sand peeled or checked paint to a
sound surface. Sand glossy surfaces dull.
Seal stains from water, smoke, ink,
pencil, grease, etc. with the appropriate
primer/sealer. Recognize that any surface
preparation short of total removal of the
old coating may compromise the service
length of the system.
Caulking
Gaps between windows, doors, trim, and
other through -wall openings can be filled
with the appropriate caulk after priming
the surface.
Cement Composition Siding/Panels
Remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose
particles, laitance, foreign material, and
peeling or defective coatings. Allow the
surface to dry thoroughly. Concrete and
masonry must be cured at least 7 days at
75°F. Fill bugholes, air pockets, cracks,
and other voids with an elastomeric patch
or sealant. Rough surfaces can be filled
to provide a smooth surface.
01/2018
www.sherwin-williams.com
continued on back
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS.
LOXON®
SELF-CLEANING ACRYLIC COATING
LX13W0051 Extra White
LX13W0053 Deep Base
LX13T0054 Ultradeep Base
LX13Y0056 Light Yellow
SURFACE PREPARATION
Masonry, Concrete, CMU
Remove all dirt, dust, mildew, loose particles,
laitance, foreign material, peeling and
defective coatings, chalk, form release agents,
moisture curing membranes, etc.
On tilt -up and poured -in-place concrete,
commercial detergents and sandblasting may
be necessary to remove sealers, release
compounds, and to provide an anchor pattern.
Allow the surface to dry thoroughly.
Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 7
days at 75°F to apply this product directly. Fill
bugholes, air pockets, cracks, and other voids
with an elastomeric patch or sealant. Rough
and porous block can be filled using Loxon
Block Surfacer to provide a smooth surface.
Mildew
Prior to attempting to remove mildew, it is
always recommended to test any cleaner on a
small, inconspicuous area prior to use. Bleach
and bleaching type cleaners may damage or
discolor existing paint films. Bleach alternative
cleaning solutions may be advised.
Mildew may be removed before painting by
washing with a solution of 1 part liquid bleach
and 3 parts water. Apply the solution and scrub
the mildewed area. Allow the solution to
remain on the surface for 10 minutes. Rinse
thoroughly with water and allow the surface to
dry before painting. Wear protective eyewear,
waterproof gloves, and protective clothing.
Quickly wash off any of the mixture that comes
in contact with your skin. Do not add
detergents or ammonia to the bleach/water
solution.
Incidental Metal
Wash to remove any oil, grease, or other
surface contamination. All corrosion must be
removed with sandpaper, wire brush, or other
abrading method. Primer required.
Wood
Sand any exposed wood to a fresh surface.
Patch all holes and imperfections with a wood
filler or putty and sand smooth. All patched
areas must be primed. Primer required.
APPLICATION
Apply at temperatures above 35°F. When the
air temperature is at 35°F, substrates may be
colder; prior to painting, check to be sure the
air, surface, and material temperature are
above 35°F and at least 5°F above the dew
point. Avoid using if rain or snow is expected
within 2-3 hours.
Do not apply at air or surface temperatures
below 35°F or when air or surface
temperatures may drop below 35°F within 48
hours.
No reduction necessary.
Do not paint in direct sun or on a hot surface.
Brush - Use a nylon/polyester brush. Purdy
Pro -Extra
Roller - Use a 1/2"-3/4" nap synthetic cover.
Purdy Marathon
Spray—Airless
Pressure
Tip
Spray and backroll on porous
to achieve required film build
free surface.
TIPS
2000 psi
.017-.021"
& rough stucco
and a pin-hole
Sealing and Patching—After cleaning the
surface thoroughly, prime the concrete
surface with Loxon Self -Cleaning Acrylic
Coating , apply an elastomeric patch or sealant
if needed, allow to dry, then topcoat.
To improve the performance consider:
• Use caution when preparing the substrate to
create a uniform surface.
• Cracks, crevices, and through -wall openings
must be patched with an elastomeric patch
or sealant.
• Fill voids and openings around window and
doors with an elastomeric patch or sealant.
• Stripe coat all inside and outside corners
and edges with 1 coat of Loxon Self -
Cleaning Acrylic Coating .
CAUTIONS
For exterior use only.
Protect from freezing.
Non-photochemically reactive.
Not for use on horizontal surfaces (floors,
roofs, decks, etc.) where water will collect.
Not for use on overhead horizontal surfaces
(under sides of balconies, soffits, etc.)
Not for use below grade. Will not withstand
hydrostatic pressure.
Before using, carefully read CAUTIONS
on label.
HOTW 01/22/2018 LX13W0051 02 41
FRC,SP,KOR
CLEANUP INFORMATION
Clean spills, spatters, hands and tools
immediately after use with soap and warm
water. After cleaning, flush spray equipment
with a compliant cleanup solvent to prevent
rusting of the equipment. Follow
manufacturer's safety recommendations when
using solvents.
The information and recommendations set forth in
this Product Data Sheet are based upon tests
conducted by or on behalf of The Sherwin-Williams
Company. Such information and recommendations
set forth herein are subject to change and pertain to
the product offered at the time of publication. Consult
your Sherwin-Williams representative or visit
www.paintdocs.com to obtain the most current
version of the PDS and/or an SDS.
LOXONTM H1
One Component Low Modulus Hybrid Sealant
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
LoxonTM H1 is a one component, low modulus, high
performance, high movement, fast -curing, non -sag, gun -grade,
moisture cure, hybrid sealant. It is designed for a wide range
of sealing and caulking applications. After curing, LoxonTM H1
exhibits a flexible, resilient, rubber -like appearance that
adheres to a wide variety of substrates. The combination of
extreme flexibility (ASTM C920 Class 50) and very low modulus
make this sealant excellent for properly constructed EIFS
substrates. 100% extension in EIFS joints with minimal stress
on bond line. LoxonTM H1 is VOC compliant in all 50 states.
APPLICATIONS
Expansion joints, vertical or horizontal, interior / exterior,
above grade, joints with high movement, aluminum, vinyl
and wood window frames, vinyl siding, skylights, doors,
foundations, fascia, precast units, store front assemblies,
panel walls, roofing, sanitary applications and parapets.
SUBSTRATES
EIFS, cementitious board, masonry, stucco, concrete, wood,
vinyl, aluminum, steel, ceramics, clay and concrete roof tiles,
stone.
SibSEALANT.WATERPROOFING
& RESTORATION INSTITUTE
Issued to: Sherwin Williams•
Product: Loxon" 111 Low Modulus Hybrid Sealant
C719: Pass ✓ Ext:+50% Comp: -50%
Substrate: Primed Mortar, Unprimed Glass,
Aluminum,-�•m,
Validation Date: 10/17/17 -10/16/22
No. 1017-LS11022 Copyright®2017
SEALANT VALIDATION
www.swrionline.org
ASTM TEST DATA
SHERWIN
VaLMMS
Meets or exceeds the following specifications:
• ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use: NT, A, M, 0
• Federal Specification TT -S-00230 C, Type 11, Class A, Non -Sag
• Federal Specification TT -S -001543A, Type 11, Class A, Non -Sag
PRODUCT AVAILABILITY*
Sales # SKU / REX Color
650858988 SU51H0010 White
650859002 SU51H4110 Limestone
650859010 SU51H2110 Stone
650859028 SU51H5010 Black
650859036 SU51H3510 Medium Bronze
650859044 SU51 H3610 Special Bronze
650859051 SU51H4510 Aluminum Gray
650859069 SU51H2210 Tan
650859077 SU51H0110 Off -White
650858996 SU51H0043 White
650859119 SU51H4143 Limestone
650859127 SU51H2143 Stone
650859135 SU51H5043 Black
650859143 SU51H3543 Medium Bronze
650859150 SU51 H3643 Special Bronze
650859168 SU51H4543 Aluminum Gray
650859176 SU51H2243 Tan
650859184 SU51H0143 Off -White
651003253 SU51H7143 Redwood Tan
* Not all products are stocked in all DSCs.
Size
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
10.1 oz Cartridge
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20 oz Sausage
20oz Sausage
20oz Sausage
TABLE 1: TYPICAL UNCURED PROPERTIES*
Property
Tack free Time
Curing Time @75°F, 50% relative humidity
Flow, Sag or Slump
Staining
Value
90 minutes
2-5 days depending on bead size
Passes
Passes
TABLE 2: TYPICAL PROPERTIES* (After full cure at 75°F & 50% RH)
Property
Hardness (Shore A)
Tensile Strength
Elongation
Adhesion in Peel
Stain & Color Change
Ozone Resistance
Joint Movement Capability
Extension
UV Resistance
Value
16+/- 2
140-180 psi
800-1,000%
35 pli
Passes
Good
+ or - 50%
100%
Good
Test Method/Note
ASTM C679
Varies with relative humidity
ASTM C639
ASTM C510
Test Method/Note
ASTM C661
ASTM D412
ASTM D412
ASTM C794
ASTM C510
ASTM C719
ASTM C1382
ASTM C793
'Values given above are not intended to be used in specification preparation.
The physical properties of fully cured LoxonTM H1 will remain relatively unchanged over a temperature range of -40°F to 180° F.
4/2017
pg 1 of 4
LOXONTM H1 One Component Low Modulus Hybrid Sealant
LIMITATIONS
Not recommended for:
a) Areas subjected to continuous water
immersion.
b) Joints contaminated with grease, wax, corrosion,
bitumen or cement laitance.
c) Horizontal joints in floors or decks where abrasion or
physical abuse is encountered.
d) Special architectural finishes without proper testing.
LOXONT^^ H1 sealant should be dry tooled. Tooling
techniques using solvents or soapy solutions are not
recommended.
All surfaces must be evaluated for adhesion prior to use.
Not designed as a glazing sealant. Do not apply on
glass or plastic glazing panels.
LOXONTM H1 is exceptional where color retention is
critical. Check tack -free time to prevent dirt pickup.
During the cure time of LOXONTM H1, do not expose to
other uncured sealants, alcohol based materials or
solvents, acids, or solvent -based materials, and certain
petroleum based products.
Until the sealant is fully cured, do not expose the sealant
to any mechanical stress. Uncured sealant will not
respond properly to cyclic expansion and contraction of the
joint specified for the cured sealant only.
LOXONT^" H1 must not be used to seal narrow joints,
fillet joints, and face nail holes.
Smearing and feathering LOXONT"" H1 over joints is not
recommended.
Lower relative humidity and temperature will extend the
curing time. Confined areas, deep joints and moisture
barrier substrates may also extend the cure time.
TECHNICAL DATA:
LOXONTM H1 exhibits excellent weatherability when
exposed to ultraviolet radiation, atmospheric hydrocarbons
and extremes in temperature. Joints designed to
accommodate 100% total joint movement will not affect
the seal or adhesion bond.
Joints properly designed and sealed will extend and
compress a total of 100% of the installation width with no
more than 50% movement in a single direction.
Cured sealant can be painted with emulsion or synthetic
enamel paints. LOXONTM H1 will be virtually unaffected
by contact with water after cure on non -porous
substrates.
On porous substrates, priming is recommended if
the sealant will be subjected to sporadic periods of
immersion. Not intended for continuous immersion.
PRECAUTIONS: IF THIS PRODUCT IS USED IN DIRECT
CONTACT WITH ANY OTHER SEALANT OR ELASTOMER
A COMPATIBILITY TEST MUST BE CONDUCTED, BY
PURCHASER OR USER, PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE.
LOXONTM H1 SEALANT IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH
OXIME CONTAINING SILICONE SEALANTS.
INSTALLATION: JOINT DESIGN AND PREPARATION
Joint design depends on a variety of factors, such as the
maximum expansion and contraction of the substrate from
thermal change. Recommended maximum joint width
should not exceed 1-1/2" (1.50") (3.81cm) and the maxi-
mum joint depth should not exceed %z" (0.500") (12.69mm).
Minimum joint width should not be less than 1/4" (0.250")
(0.34mm). The sealant depth should be %" (0.34mm) for
joints %" in width. For joints over'/" in width, depth should
be 1/2 of the joint width but should not exceed 1/2" (0.500")
(12.69mm) in depth. In order to obtain the recommended
sealant mass, the joint should be filled with closed cell
backer rod first, leaving the proper depth to be filled with
sealant. Desirable backer rod materials are polyethylene
or polyethylene non -gassing foamed rod. Do not prime
or puncture the dosed cell structure of polyethylene rod as
bubbles could form and migrate to the surface of the curing
sealant. The use of open cell backer rod is not
recommended. In situations where joint depth does not
allow for use of backer rod, bond breaker (polyethelene
strip) should be used to prevent three -sided adhesion.
seal.nt
SURFACE PREPARATION:
Old sealant should be completely removed. Concrete and
masonry surfaces must be free of foreign matter and
contaminants. Dust and loose particles should be blown
out of joints. A clean, dry, sound and uncontaminated
surface is mandatory. Stone surfaces must be cohesively
sound, dry and free of contaminants. Granite, limestone,
marble and sandstone must be pre -tested for adhesion
prior to sealant installation.
When used in conjunction with EIFS systems, LoxonTm H1
should be applied to system base coat to avoid
delamination of EIFS finish. Base coat must be cured, of
proper depth, well bonded and sound. Some EIFS
systems may require a primer. Refer to EIFS manufacturer
recommendations.
Mill finish aluminum may contain an invisible oil film or
oxide. Clean with an appropriate solvent. The use of
solvents may be hazardous to your health. Use only in
well ventilated areas. KEEP AWAY FROM OPEN FLAME.
Read all labeling before use and follow solvent
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for safe
handling. Many high-performance coatings or unusual
surface treatments may require abrasion of the surface
with steel wool or fine emery paper during preparation.
PRIMING:
I4/2017 pg 2 of 4
Certain situations or substrates may require a
primer. Ensure compatibility before using primers.
See primer PDS for details and proper use
(SUPRIQDI3 or SUPRIPS13).
a) Priming of masonry or other porous substrate joints
with SUPRIPS13 is recommended if the joints will be
subjected to intermittent immersion.
LOXONTM HI One Component Low Modulus Hybrid Sealant
b) Some metals and non -porous surfaces may require
priming with SUPRIQDI3.
c) It is recommended that all surfaces be pre -tested with
LOXONTM H1 sealant to determine if cleaning will be
necessary to remove surface contamination. In the
case of some exotic coatings, priming or other surface
treatment may be necessary.
KEEP AWAY FROM OPEN FLAME. Read all labeling before
use, and follow solvent manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions for safe handling. Tool and application equipment
may also be leaned with the same solvents. The dried
sealant can be removed by cutting with a sharp -edged tool;
thin films by abrading.
CAUTIONS
Danger. May cause an allergic skin reaction. May damage
fertility. May damage the unborn child. Causes skin irritation.
Causes serious eye irritation. Suspected of causing cancer.
Prevention: Obtain special instructions before use. Avoid breathing
dusts/vapours. Do not handle until all safety precautions have been
read and understood. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. Wear
protective gloves. Wear eye or face protection. Use personal
protective equipment as required. Contaminated work dothing
should not be allowed out of the workplace. Response: IF exposed
or concerned: Get medical attention. IF ON SKIN: Wash with plenty
of soap and water. If skin irritation or rash occurs: Get medical
attention. Take off contaminated clothing. Wash contaminated
clothing before reuse. IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for
several minutes. Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do.
Continue rinsing. IF exposed or concemed: Get medical attention. If
skin irritation occurs: Get medical attention. If eye irritation persists:
Get medical attention. Storage: Store locked up. Disposal: Dispose
of contents and container in accordance with all local, regional,
national and intemational regulations. WARNING: This product
contains chemicals known to the State of Califomia to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm. FOR INDUSTRIAL
USE ONLY. Please refer to the SDS for additional information. Do
not transfer contents to other containers for storage. Percentage of
the mixture consisting of ingredient(s) of unknown toxicity: 58%
d) LOXONT"^ H1 Sealant is compatible with most coatings
and treatments, but due to the vast numbers of, and
types of surface coatings available, Sherwin-
Williams recommends pre -testing LOXONT^" H1
sealant on the surface in question. Follow
manufacturer's recommended recoat times for
application of LOXONTM H1 sealant to primers or
treatments. Check primer or treatment for surface
contaminants prior to application of sealant.
METHOD OF APPLICATION:
All surfaces must be structurally sound, clean, dry,
and fully cured. A field adhesion (pull test) in test joints
is recommended, before application. Apply LOXONT^"
H1 sealant in a continuous operation, using a
professional grade caulking gun and positive pressure
adequate to properly fill and seal the joint.
TOOLING:
LOXONTM' H1 sealant should be dry tooled. Toon techniques
using solvents or soapy solutions are not recommended.
Tooling of freshly applied sealant is necessary for
proper adhesion. Tool the sealant with adequate
pressure to spread the sealant against the back-up
material and onto the joint surfaces.ifjoint surfaces have
been masked, remove masking tape immediately
after tooling.
PAINTING:
Exercise caution if painting. When painting over
LOXONT"^ H1 sealant with primers, top -coats or
treatments, cracking or peeling of these coatings could
occur because of joint movement. In general, oil-based
paints are not recommended because of their relatively
poor elastic properties and because of their potential
interaction with the sealant chemistry, which may create
non -curing conditions for the painted sealant. Do not paint
over LOXONTM H1 sealant until it has formed a skin
(thin film). Cure is dependent on temperature and
humidity.
LOXONT"" H1 sealant when applied in a typical 1/2" x
1/4" bead and backed with a suitable bond -breaker at
75°F and 50% RH, will be acceptable for painting with
breathable coatings within 24 hours and non -breathable
coatings after 72 hours. Warmer, more humid
conditions will allow LOXONT"^ H1 sealant to cure more
quickly and conversely, cooler and/or drier conditions will
lengthen the cure time. A small test area is strongly
recommended.
CLEANING:
Cured sealant is very difficult to remove. Excess sealant
and smears should be dry -wiped from all surfaces while
still uncured, followed with a commercial solvent such as
xylol, toluol or methyl ethyl ketone. The use of these
solvents (or other solvents) may be hazardous to
your health.
I4/2017 pg 3 of 4
SHELF UFE:
LOXONT^" H1 sealant will exhibit a 15 month shelf life from the date
of manufacture when stored at room temperature.
LIMITEDWARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY: Sherwin-Williams warrants for one
year from date of use if used as directed and within product
shelf life (as set forth in the current Sherwin-Williams
Product Data Sheet (the "PDS") for this product) that this
product will be free from manufacturing defects and meet
the specifications set forth in the product PDS. Sherwin-
Williams makes no warranty as to appearance or color.
If this product fails to meet the foregoing warranty, as your
sole remedy, upon proof of purchase, we will replace the
product at no cost or refund the original purchase price.
Labor or costs associated with labor not included. This
warranty is made to the original purchaser and is not
transferable. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
MERCHANTABILITY, WHICH ARE ALL DISCLAIMED
AND/OR LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW. WE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST
PROFITS) FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LOXONTM H1 One Component Low Modulus Hybrid Sealant
When using this reference chart, you MUST
consider the physical limitations of the product
you are using. Not all products can be used in
the gap sizes shown.
Performance Tips:
• Prevent LoxonT"" H1 from coming into contact with
oil-based sealants, uncured silicone sealants,
polysulfides, or fillers that contain oil, tar or asphalt.
• LOXONTM H1 sealant will not adhere to previously
applied silcone sealants.
• Protect unopened containers from direct sunlight
and heat.
• In cool or cold weather, store container(s) at room
temperature for at least 24 hours, before using.
• LoxonTM H1 can be applied below freezing
temperatures only if: substrates are completely
dry and free of moisture, and clean.
• Do not apply over freshly treated wood; treated
wood must have been weathered for at least six months.
• Do not use in swimming pools or other submerged
conditions.
• Substrates such as stainless steel, copper, and
galvanized steel typically require the use of a
primer. LoxonT"" Quick Dry primer SUPRIQDI3 is
acceptable. LoxonTm Quick Dry primer SUPRIQDI3
can also be used for Kynar 500 based coatings. An
adhesion test is recommended for any questionable
substrate.
• LoxonTM H1 should not be used in glazing applications.
Do not apply on glass or plastic glazing panels.
4/2017 pg 4 of 4 SW12
1/4"
318""
112"
114"
24'
-
-
318"
16'
-
-
112"
12'
-
-
518"
10'
T
-
314"
-
6'
4'
7/8"
-
5'
4'
1"
-
4'
3'
When using this reference chart, you MUST
consider the physical limitations of the product
you are using. Not all products can be used in
the gap sizes shown.
Performance Tips:
• Prevent LoxonT"" H1 from coming into contact with
oil-based sealants, uncured silicone sealants,
polysulfides, or fillers that contain oil, tar or asphalt.
• LOXONTM H1 sealant will not adhere to previously
applied silcone sealants.
• Protect unopened containers from direct sunlight
and heat.
• In cool or cold weather, store container(s) at room
temperature for at least 24 hours, before using.
• LoxonTM H1 can be applied below freezing
temperatures only if: substrates are completely
dry and free of moisture, and clean.
• Do not apply over freshly treated wood; treated
wood must have been weathered for at least six months.
• Do not use in swimming pools or other submerged
conditions.
• Substrates such as stainless steel, copper, and
galvanized steel typically require the use of a
primer. LoxonT"" Quick Dry primer SUPRIQDI3 is
acceptable. LoxonTm Quick Dry primer SUPRIQDI3
can also be used for Kynar 500 based coatings. An
adhesion test is recommended for any questionable
substrate.
• LoxonTM H1 should not be used in glazing applications.
Do not apply on glass or plastic glazing panels.
4/2017 pg 4 of 4 SW12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Industrial
Marine
Coatings
2.11
KEM KROMIK®
UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER
B5ONZ6 BROWN
B5oWZ1 OFF WHITE
B50AZ6 GRAY
PRODUCT INFORMATION Revised 4/05
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
RECOMMENDED USES
KEM KROMIK UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER is a rust inhib-
Ring, low VOC, modified alkyd resin primer designed for use
over iron and steel substrates. Can be used as a 'universal"
primer under high performance topcoats and is also suitable•
as a °battler° coat over conventional coatings which would
normally be attacked by strong solvents In high performance
coatings.
• High fin build
• Corrosion resistant
• Can be topcoated with epoxies and urethanes
• Apply down to 40°F
For use over prepared steel.
• "Universal' primer
• Shopcoat primer
•Barrier° coating
• Maintenance primer
• Interior / exterior metal primer
• Structural steel
• Equipment 1 machinery
• Marine vessels
• Hand rails
• Conforms to AWWA 0102-03, OCS #1
• Suitable for use in USDA inspected facilities
PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Finish: Fiat
Color: Brown, Off White, Gray
Volume Solids: 53% ± 2%
Weight Solids: 73% ± 2%
VOC (EPA Method 24): <420 gfL, 3.5 ib/gal, Off White
Recommended Spreading Rats per coat:
Wet mils: 6.0 - 8.0
Dry mils: 3.0 - 4.0
Coverage: 212 - 283 sq ft/gal approximate
NOTE Bnrshorrolapplcaiionmayrequkerrxilipiecoatsba hie ernaoci u.gym
fknlcknessanduntamayofappearance.
Drying Schedule ®6.0 mils wet ® 50% RH:
0 40°F @77°F @110°F
To touch: 2 hours 30 minutes 15 minutes
Tack free: 214 hours 1 hour 20 minutes
To recoat with itself and alkyds:
2/ hours 1 hour 45 minutes
To recoat with high performance/hot solvent topcoats:
36 hours 16 hours 16 hours
To cure: 7 days 7 days 7 days
Note: Formaximumadiesion,acrylctopooatsregquIre48-72hoursdrying
ofprimer.
Drykrgtineistempetature, limthblalessdependent.
Shelf Life: 36 months, unopened
F
Store indoors at 40°F to 100°F.
Flash Point: 80°F, PMCC
Reducer: Not recommended
Clean Up: Xylene, R2K4
System Tested: (unless otherwise indicated)
Substrate: Steel
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal 3.0 mils dft
Abrasion Resistance:
Method: ASTM 04060, CS17 wheel, 1000 cydes, 1 kg bad
Result: 250 mg loss
Adhesion:
Method: ASTM D4541
Result: 260 psi
Direct Impact Resistance:
Method: ASTM D2794
Result: 70 in. lbs.
Dry Heat Resistance:
Method: ASTM D2485
Resubi 200°F
Flexibility:
Method: ASTM D522, 180° bend, 1/4' mandrel
Result: Passes
Moisture Condensation Resistance:
Method: ASTM D4585, 100°F, 500 hours
Result: Good
Pencil Hardness:
Method: ASTM D3363
Result: H
Salt Fog Resistance:
Method: ASTM B117, 500 hours
Result: Good
MShock:
T
Method: ASTM D2246, 5 cycles
Method:
Result: Passes
Provides performance comparable to products formulated to
federal specifications: TTP -664D.
Alkyd
2.11
continued on back
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Industrial
Marine
Coatings
2.11
KEM KROMIK®
UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER
B5ONZ6 BROWN
B5OWZ1 OFF WHITE
B50AZ6 GRAY
PRODUCT INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED SYSTEMS
SURFACE PREPARATION
Steel, Alkyd Topcoat:
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
0 3.0 - 4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. Industrial Enamel HS 0 2.0 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
or WB Industrial Enamel 0 1.5 - 3.0 mils dft/ct
or Steel Spec Fast Dry Alkyd 0 3.0 - 5.0 mils dft/ct
Steel, Aluminum Finish:
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
Surface must be clean, dry, and In sound condition. Remove
all oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material
to ensure adequate adhesion.
Refer to product Application Bulletin for detailed surface prepa-
ration Information.
Minimum recommended surface preparation:
Iron & Steel: SSPC-SP2
0 3.0 - 4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. Silver -Brite Aluminum 0 1.0 - 1.5 mils dft/ct
TINT
Steel, Acrylic Topcoat:
Do not tint.
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
03.0-4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. DTM Acrylic Coating 0 2.5 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
or Sher-Cryl HPA 0 2.5 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
Steel, Epoxy Topcoat:
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
03.0-4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. Tile -Clad HS Epoxy 0 2.5 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
Steel, Polyurethane Topcoat:
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
0 3.0 - 4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. HI -Solids Polyurethane 0 3.0 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
or Polylon 1900 Polyurethane 0 2.0 - 3.0 mils dft/ct
Steel, Silicone Alkyd Topcoat:
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
03.0-4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. Steel Master 9500 0 2.5 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
Steel, Water Based Epoxy Topcoat:
1 ct. Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
0 3.0 - 4.0 mils dft
1-2 cts. Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy
0 2.5-4.0mils dft/ct
or Waterbased Tile Clad Epoxy 0 2.0 - 4.0 mils dft/ct
The systems listed above are representative of the product's
use. Other systems may be appropriate.
APPLICATION CONDITIONS
Temperature: 40°F minimum, 120°F maximum
(air, surface, and material)
At least 5°F above dew point
Relative humidity: 85% maximum
Refer to product Application Bulletin for detailed application
information.
ORDERING INFORMATION
packaging: 1 and 5 gallon containers
Weight per gallon: 12.5 t 0.35 Ib, may vary with color
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change
without notice. Contact your Sherwin-Williams representative
for additional technical data and instructions.
DISCLAIMER 1 WARRANTY
The Information and ►ecommerrdatiornssut forth in this Product Data Sheet are The Sherwin-Williams Company warrants our products to be free of manufactur-
based upon tests conducted by o on behalf of The Sherwin-Williams Company• ing defects in accord wlfh applicable ve, if any, Nm ma quality control ment of the
Such information and recommendations set forth herein are subject to change debility for products theprore defective, if urch Is Bpr iceted p replacement of defective
and pertain to the product offered at the time of publication. Consult your product ae product o the refund of the spNO OTse price paid for tYe R GUAR -
Sherwin -Williams representative to obtain the most recent Product Data Info-ANTEE OF AN ISermined MADE BYASHERWIN-WILLIAMS EXPRESSED OR
motion and Application Bulletin. IMPLIED, STATUTORY, BY OPERATION OF LAW OR OTHERWISE, INCLUD-
ING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Industrial
Marine
Coatings
2.11A
KEM KROMIK®
UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER
B5ONZ6
BROWN
B50WZ1 OFF WHITE
B50AZ6 GRAY
APPLICATION BULLETIN
Revised 4/05
SURFACE PREPARATION
APPLICATION CONDITIONS
Surface must be clean, dry, and In sound condition. Remove
all oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material
to ensure adequate adhesion.
Iron & Steel
Minimum surface preparation is Hand Tool Clean per SSPC-
SP2. Remove all oil and grease from surface by Solvent Clean-
ing per SSPC-SP1. For better performance, use Commercial
Blast Cleaning per SSPC-SP6, blast clean all surfaces using
a sharp, angular abrasive for optimum surface profile (2 mils).
Prime any bare steel within 8 hours or before flash rusting
occurs.
Previously Painted Surfaces
If in sound condition, clean the surface of all foreign material.
Smooth, hard, or glossy coatings and surfaces should be dulled
by abrading the surface. Apply a test area, allowing paint to
dry one week before testing adhesion. If adhesion is poor, or if
this product attacks the previous finish, removal of the previ-
ous coating may be necessary. If paint is peeling or badly weath-
ered, clean surface to sound substrate and treat as a new
surface as above.
As a "Barden" Coat:
It if is necessary to topcoat a previously painted surface with
chemically resistant or strong solvent topcoats, Kem Kromik
Universal Metal Primer can be used as a barrier coat to pre-
vent lifting. Apply a coat of Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer
to a small area to test for adhesion or bleeding. If there is
evidence of either poor adhesion or bleeding, clean surface to
bare substrate and apply recommended system.
Temperature:
Relative humidity:
40°F minimum, 120°F maximum
(air, surface, and material)
At least 5°F above dew point
85% maximum
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
The following Is a guide. Changes in pressures and tip sizes
may be needed for proper spray characteristics. Always purge
spray equipment before use with listed reducer. Any reduction
must be compliant with existinng VOC regulations and com-
patible with the existing environmental and application condi-
tions.
Reducer Not recommended
Clean Up Xylene, R2K4
Airless Spray
Pressure 1800-3000 psi
Hose 1/4" ID
Tip 015"-.019'
Filter 60 mesh
Conventional Spray
Gun Sinks 95
63C
63PB
Fluid Nozzle
Air Nozzle
Atomization Pressure 50 psi
Fluid Pressure 15-20 psi
Brush
Brush Natural Bristle
Roller
Cover 3/8" woven with phenolic core
If specific application equipment is not listed above, equiva-
lent equipment may be substituted.
2.11 A
continued on back
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Industrial
Marine
Coatings
2.11A
KEM KROM I K®
UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER
B5ONZ6 BROWN B5OWZ1 OFF WHITE
B50AZ6 GRAY
APPLICATION BULLETIN
APPLICATION PROCEDURES
PERFORMANCE TIPS
Surface preparation must be completed as indicated.
Mixing Instructions: Mix paint thoroughly by boxing and stir-
ring before use.
Apply paint at the recommended film thickness and spreading
rate as Indicated below:
Recommended Spreading Rate per coat:
Wet mils: 8.0 - 8.0
Dry mils: 3.0 - 4.0
Coverage: 212 - 283 sq ft/gal approximate
NOTE Brush or roti application may require multiple coats to achieve
maximumtbnlrticlateasandtni om iIydappearanoe.
Drying Schedule M 6.0 mils wet 0 50% RH:
0 40°F 0 77°F 0 110°F
To touch: 2 hours 30 minutes 15 minutes
Tack free: 2% hours 1 hour 20 minutes
To recoat with itself and alkyds:
214 hours 1 hour 45 minutes
To recoat with high performance/hot solvent topcoats:
36 hours 16 hours 16 hours
To cure: 7 days 7 days 7 days
Note: Formaxhnumactesion,acayictopcoatsrequire48-72hoursckyk g
cprimer.
Drying time Isttemperature, humkliy, and Sm thickness dependent.
Application of coating above maximum or below minimum rec-
ommended spreading rate may adversely affect coating per-
formance.
Stripe coat all crevices, wells, and sharp angles to prevent
early failure in these areas.
When using spray application, use a 50% overlap with each
pass of the gun to avoid holidays, bare areas, and pinholes. If
necessary, cross spray at a right angle.
Spreading rates are calculated on volume solids and do not
include an application loss factor due to surface profile, rough -
nese or porosity of the surface, skill and technique of the ap-
pllcator, method of application, various surface irregularities,
material lost during mixing, spillage, overthinning, climatic con-
ditions, and excessive film build.
No reduction of material is recommended as it can affect film
build, appearance, and adhesion.
Intimate contact with the steel surface and primer is nacos-
sary for adequate rust inhibition and adhesion.
Refer to Product Information sheet for additional performance
characteristics and properties.
CLEAN UP INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Clean spill and spatters immediately with Xylene, R2K4. Clean
tools immediately after use with Xylene, R2K4. Follow
manufacturer's safety recommendations when using any sol-
vent.
Refer to the MSDS sheet before use.
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change
without notice. Contact your Sherwin-Williams representative
for additional technical data and instructions.
DISCLAIMER
WARRANTY
The Information and recommendations set forts In this Product Data Sheet are
based upon tests conducted by or on behalf of The Sherwin-WaIams Company.
Such information and recommendations set forth herein are subject to change
and pertain to the product offered at the time of publication. Consult your
Sherwin-WINtams representative to obtain the most recent Product Data Infor-
mat�n and Application Bulletin.
The Sherwin-Williams Company warrants our products to be free of manufactur-
es.
ive, any, Is limo ted to replacement of the
with sen defecicabletive,
M9 defy co in producaccorts proven detecfith If any, purchase pricd po d f r the d of the
Liability for product fective
determined MADE BY SH NON -W LLR WARRANTYORR-
product a p e erm aotb a refund of the s.NOT price paid for tYe R OUAR-
ANTEE OF ANY KIND IS BY SHERWIN-WILLIAMS, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, STATUTORY, BY OPERATION OF LAW OR OTHERWISE, INCLUD-
ING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TME
E11NTH
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS.
PRO
1NDUSTRIALTM
As of 05/31/2011, Complies with:
OTC
SCAQMD
CARB
MPI Spec#
NGBS
Yes LEED® 09 CI
No LEED® 09 NC
No LEED® 09 CS
No LEED® 09 S
No
No
No
No
No
CHARACTERISTICS
Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel is a high solids, high gloss, low
VOC coating intended for interior/
exterior use in industrial environments.
It is easy to brush, roll or spray. Pro-
vides performance comparable to sili-
cone alkyds.
• Modified with urethane resin for in-
creased exterior durability
• Resistant to chipping and flaking
• Resists premature yellowing
• Abrasion resistant
• Appropriate for interior and exterior
applications
• Very good gloss and color retention
• Excellent application characteristics
• Suitable for use in USDA inspected
facilities
Color: Most Colors
Recommended Spread Rate per coat:
Wet mils: 3.5-7.0
Dry mils: 2.0 - 4.0
Coverage: 231 - 462 sq ft/gal
approximate
Note: Brush or roll application may require multiple
coats to achieve maximum film thickness and uni-
formity of appearance.
Drying Time @ 4.0 mils wet 50% RH:
45°F 77°F 120°F
To touch: 4 hrs 2'/2 hrs 30 min
Tack free: 10 hrs 4 hrs 2 hrs
To recoat: 36 hrs 18 hrs 8 hrs
To cure: 7 days 7 days 5 days
Drying time is temperature, humidity, and film thick-
ness dependent.
Finish: Gloss
Flash Point: >100°F, PMCC
Shelf Life: 36 months, unopened
Store indoors at 40°F to 100°F.
Tinting with Blend -A -Color or MaxiToner:
Base oz/gal Strength
Extra White 0-6 100%
Ultradeep 4-12 100%
B54W00151 (may vary by color)
VOC (EPA Method 24): Unreduced:
<330g/L; <2.75 Ib/gal
Volume Solids: 58% ± 2%
Weight Solids: 72% ± 2%
Wei • ht • = r Gallon: 10.81b
113.11
Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
B54-150 Series
CHARACTERISTICS
Steel (alkyd primer):
1 ct. Kem Bond HS Primer
1-2 cts. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
Aluminum:
1 ct. DTM Wash Primer
1-2 cts. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
Galvanized Metal:
1 ct. Galvite HS
1-2 cts. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
Concrete Block:
1 ct. Heavy Duty Block Filler
1-2 cts. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
Interior Plaster and Poured Concrete:
1 ct. PrepRite Masonry Primer
1-2 cts. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
Drywall:
1 ct.
1-2 cts.
PrepRite 200 Latex Primer
Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
Wood Floors (Foot Traffic):
1-2 cts. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd
Enamel
System Tested: (unless otherwise indicated)
Substrate: Steel
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1 ct. Kem Bond HS Primer
1 ct. Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel
Test Name
Test Method
Results
Abrasion
ASTM D4060, C517
wheel, 1000 cycles,
1 kg load
175 mg loss
Adhesion
ASTM D4541
392 psi
Direct Impact
Resistance
ASTM D2794
60 in. lbs.
Dry Heat
Resistance
ASTM D2485
200°F (93°C)
(discolors)
Flexibility
(topcoat only)
ASTM D522, 180° bend,
1/4" mandrel
Passes
Humidity
Resistance
ASTM D4548, 500
hours
Rating 10 per ASTM D610 for
Rusting; Rating 10 per ASTM
D714 for Blistering
Pencil Hardness
ASTM D3363
B
Salt Fog
Resistance
ASTM B117, 500 hours
Rating 10 per ASTM D610 for
Rusting; Rating 10 per ASTM
0714 for Blistering
6/2011
www.sherwin-williams.com
continued on back
PRO INDUSTRIAL TM
URETHANE ALKYD ENAMEL
SHERWIN-WILLIAMS.
SURFACE PREPARATION
WARNING! Removal of old paint by sanding, scraping or other means may generate dust
or fumes that contain lead. Exposure to lead dust or fumes may cause brain damage or
other adverse health effects, especially in children or pregnant women. Controlling expo-
sure to lead or other hazardous substances requires the use of proper protective equip-
ment, such as a properly fitted respirator (NIOSH approved) and proper containment and
cleanup. For more information, call the National Lead Information Center at 1 -800 -424 -
LEAD (in US) or contact your local health authority.
Surface must be clean, dry, and in sound condition. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt,
loose rust, and other foreign material to ensure adequate adhesion.
Iron & Steel
Remove all oil and grease from surface by Solvent Cleaning per SSPC-SP1. Minimum
surface preparation is Hand Tool Clean per SSPC-SP2. For better performance, use Com-
mercial Blast Cleaning per SSPC-SP6/NACE 3, blast clean all surfaces using a sharp,
angular abrasive for optimum surface profile (2 mils / 50 microns). Prime any bare steel
within 8 hours or before flash rusting occurs.
Aluminum
Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by Solvent Cleaning per
SSPC-SP1. Primer required.
Galvanized Steel
AIIow to weather a minimum of six months prior to coating. Solvent Clean per SSPC-SP1.
When weathering is not possible, or the surface has been treated with chromates or sili-
cates, first Solvent Clean per SSPC-SP1 and apply a test patch. AIIow paint to dry at least
one week before testing adhesion. If adhesion is poor, brush blasting per SSPC-SP7 is
necessary to remove these treatments. Primer required. Rusty galvanizing requires a mini-
mum of Hand Tool Cleaning per SSPC-SP2, prime the area the same day as cleaned.
Masonry and Concrete
For surface preparation, refer to SSPC-SP13/NACE 6 or ICRI No. 310.2, CSP 1-3. Sur-
faces should be thoroughly clean and dry. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 28
days @ 75°F (24°C). Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free
of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose
cement and hardeners. Fill bug holes, air pockets and other voids with ArmorSeal Crack
Filler. Weathered masonry and soft or porous cement board must be brush blasted or
power tool cleaned to remove loosely adhering contamination and to get to a hard, firm
surface. Laitance must be removed. Brick must be allowed to weather for one year prior to
surface preparation and painting. Primer required.
Wood
Surface must be clean, dry, and sound. Paint as soon as possible. No painting should be
done immediately after a rain or during foggy weather. Knots and pitch streaks must be
scraped, sanded and spot primed. All nail holes or small openings must be properly
caulked. Sand to remove any loose or deteriorated surface wood and to obtain a proper
surface profile. Self priming.
Previously Painted Surfaces
If in sound condition, clean the surface of all foreign material. Smooth, hard or glossy coat-
ings and surfaces should be dulled by abrading the surface. Apply a test area, allowing
paint to dry one week before testing adhesion. If adhesion is poor, or if this product attacks
the previous finish, removal of the previous coating may be necessary. If paint is peeling
or badly weathered, clean surface to sound substrate and treat as a new surface as
above.
APPLICATION
Temperature: 40°F minimum
120°F maximum
(air, surface, and material)
At least 5°F above dew point
Relative humidity: 85% maximum
The following is a guide. Changes in pressures and
tip sizes may be needed for proper spray character-
istics. Always purge spray equipment before use
with listed reducer. Any reduction must be compati-
ble with the existing environmental and application
conditions.
Reducer/Clean Up
Mineral Spirits, R1 K4* or Xylene, R2K4
Airless Spray
Pressure 1800 psi minimum
Hose 3/8" ID
Tip .017" - .019"
Filter 60 - 100 mesh
Reduction As needed up to 10% by volume
Conventional Spray
Gun Binks 95
Fluid Nozzle 66
Air Nozzle
63PB
Atomization Pressure 50 psi
Fluid Pressure 20-25 psi
Reduction As needed up to 10% by volume
Brush
Brush Nylon/polyester or natural bristle
Reduction As needed up to 10% by volume
Roller
Cover
1/4 - 3/8" lambswool or synthetic cover
Reduction As needed up to 10% by volume
* To maintain VOC compliance of 340
g/I, only a 2% reduction of Mineral Spir-
its, R1 K4 is allowed.
CLEANUP INFORMATION
Clean spills, spatters, hands and tools
immediately after use with mineral spir-
its. Follow manufacturer's safety recom-
mendations when using mineral spirits.
The information and recommendations set forth in this Product Data Sheet are based upon tests conducted by or on behalf of The Sherwin-Williams Company.
Such information and recommendations set forth herein are subject to change and pertain to the product offered at the time of publication. Consult your Sherwin-
Williams representative to obtain the most recent Product Data Information and Application Bulletin.
The Sherwin-Williams Company warrants our products to be free of manufacturing defects in accord with applicable Sherwin-Williams quality control procedures.
Liability for products proven defective, if any, is limited to replacement of the defective product or the refund of the purchase price paid for the defective product as
determined by Sherwin-Williams. NO OTHER WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE OF ANY KIND IS MADE BY SHERWIN-WILLIAMS, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
STATUTORY, BY OPERATION OF LAW OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�1l
COVER \
EARTHE \
H
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS
Protective
Marine
Coatings
Revised: June 9, 2016
BOND-PLEX
WATERBASED ACRYLIC COATING
PRODUCT INFORMATION
B71-200 SERIES
1.27
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Bond-Plex WB Acrylic is a single component, waterborne acrylic,
adhesion promoting coating formulated for direct application to pre -
finished metal siding. Suitable for interior or exterior use.
• Outstanding early moisture resistance
• Outstanding exterior durability and gloss retention
• Eliminates the use of a primer over pre -finished siding
• Fast dry
• Low odor, low VOC
• Very good mar resistance
• Outstanding application characteristics
PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS
Finish: White & Colors (Low Sheen)
Aluminum (Gloss)
Color: Wide range of colors available
Volume Solids: Extra White Aluminum
(may vary by color) 41% ± 2% 37% ±2
Weight Solids: 55.0% ± 2% 39.0% ± 2%
VOC: (EPA 24) <100 g/L; 0. 83 Ib/gal <200g/L; 1.67
Ib/gal (unreduced)
Recommended Spreading Rate per coat:
Minimum Maximum
White & Colors
Wet mils (microns) 4.8 (120)
Dry mils (microns) 2.0 (50)
—Coverage sq ft/gal (m2/L) 164 (4.0)
Aluminum
Wet mils (microns) 5.0 (125)
Dry mils (microns) 2.0 (50)
—Coverage sq ft/gal (m2/L) 148 (3.6)
Theoretical coverage sq ft/gal 640 (15.7 )
(m2/L) @ 1 mil / 25 microns dft
NOTE: Brush or roll application may require multiple coats to
achieve maximum film thickness and uniformity of appearance.
10.0 (250)
4.0 (100)
329 (8.0)
11.0 (275)
4.0 (100)
296 (7.3)
Drying Schedule 5.0 mils wet (125 microns):
@ 50°F/10°C @ 77°F/25°C @ 120°F/49°C
50% RH
1.5 hours 45 minutes 20 minutes
6 hours 4 hours 2 hours
8 hours 4 hours 2 hours
To touch:
To handle:
To recoat:
To cure: 14 days 7 days 5 days
Drying time is temperature, humidity, and film thickness dependent.
Shelf Life:
Flash Point:
36 months, unopened
Olurninum -12 months
Store indoors at 50°I` (1 °C) to
100°F (38°C)
>200°F (93°C) PMCC
Reducer/Clean Up: Water
RECOMMENDED USES
For use over pre -finished siding in industrial environments such as:
• Fluorocarbons (Kynar)
• Polyester Polymers
• Silicone Polyesters
For use in markets such as:
• General Industrial, Petro -Chem, Power, Water
• Food and beverage
• Pharmaceutical
• When a low sheen finish is required to match existing coil coated
metal siding.
• Suitable for use in USDA inspected facilities (except Aluminum).
• Acceptable for use in high performance architectural applications.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Substrate*: Pre -Finished Siding
Surface Preparation*: SSPC-SP1
System Tested*:
1 ct. Bond-Plex WB Acrylic @ 2-4 mils (50-100 microns)
*unless otherwise noted below
Test Name
Test Method
Results
Adhesion
j ASTM D4541
' 300 psi minimum
Corrosion
Weathering'
ASTM D5894,
5 cycles, 1,680
hours
Rating 10 per ASTM
D610 for rusting ;
Ratingl0 per ASTM
D714 for blistering
Direct Impact
Resistance
' ASTM D2794
Direct: 160 in. lbs.
Reverse: 160 in.
lbs.
Dry Heat
Resistance
, ASTM D2485
200°F (94°C)
Flexibility
ASTM D522, 180°
bend, 1/4' mandrel
Passes
Humidity
Resistance'
' ASTM D4585, 500
' hours
Rating 10 per ASTM
D610 for rusting ;
Rating 8 per ASTM
D714 for blistering
Pencil Hardness
' ASTM D3363
2B
Salt Fog
Resistance'
ASTM B117, 500
hours
Rating 9 per ASTM
D610 for rusting ;
Rating 10 per ASTM
0714 for blistering
Thermal Cycling
ASTM D2246, 5
cycles
Rating 10 per ASTM
D714 for blistering
Provides performance comparable to SSPC-Paint 23.
Footnotes
' with 1 ct. DTM Bonding Primer
www.sherwin-williams.com/protective
continued on back
r
COVEREARTH
tj
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS
Protective
Marine
Coatings
BOND-PLEX
WATERBASED ACRYLIC COATING
PRODUCT INFORMATION
B71-200 SERIES
1.27
RECOMMENDED SYSTEMS
Prefinished Siding:
Fluorocarbon, Silicon Polyester,
1-2 cts. Bond-Plex WB Acrylic
.4L
1 ct. DTM Bonding Primer
1-2 cts. Bond-Plex WB Acrylic
Dry Film Thickness / ct
Ali;: %Microns)
Polyester Polymers:
2.0-4.0 (50-100)
2.0-5.0 (50-125)
2.0-4.0 (50-100)
Previously Painted, Hard, Slick or Glossy Surfaces:
1-2 cts. Bond-Plex WB Acrylic 2.0-4.0 (50-100)
1 ct. DTM Bonding Primer 2.0-5.0 (50-125)
1-2 cts. Bond-Plex WB Acrylic 2.0-4.0 (50-100)
Always check compatibility of the previously painted surface with
the new coating by applying a test patch of 2-3 square feet. Allow
to dry thoroughly for 1 week before checking adhesion.
The systems listed above are representative of the product's use,
other systems may be appropriate.
DISCLAIMER
The information and recommendations set forth in this Product Data Sheet are
based upon tests conducted by or on behalf of The Sherwin-Williams Company.
Such information and recommendations set forth herein are subject to change and
pertain to the product offered at the time of publication. Consult your Sherwin-
Williams representative to obtain the most recent Product Data Information and
Application Bulletin.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Surface must be clean dry, and in sound condition. Remove all
oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material to
ensure adequate adhesion.
Do not use hydrocarbon solvents for cleaning.
Refer to product Application Bulletin for detailed surface prepara-
tion information.
Minimum recommended surface repparation:
Prefinished Siding: SSPG-SP1
Previously Painted: SSPC-SP1
Surface Preparation Standards
Condition of ISO 8501-1 Swedish Std.
Surface BS7079:A1 SIS055900 SSPC NACE
White Metal Sa 3 Sa 3 SP 5 1
Near White Metal Sa 2.5 Sa 2.5 SP 10 2
Commercial Blast Sa 2 Sa 2 SP 6 3
Brush -Off Blast Sa 1 Sa 1 SP 7 4
Rusted C St 2 C St 2 SP 2 -
Pitted & Rusted D St 2 D St 2 SP 2 -
Power Tool Cleaning
RustediRusted C St 3 C St 3 SP 3 -
Hand Tool Cleaning
TINTING
Tint with CCE or EnviroToner colorants at 100% strength. Do not
use BAC. Do not tint the Aluminum.
Five minutes minimum mixing on a mechanical shaker is required for
complete mixing of color.
APPLICATION CONDITIONS
Temperature: 50°F (10°C) minimum, 120°F (49°C)
maximum
(air, surface, and material)
At least 5°F (2.8°C) above dew point
Relative humidity: 85% maximum
Refer to product Application Bulletin for detailed application information.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Packaging:
Weight:
1 gallon (3.78L) and 5 gallon (18.9L)
containers
White: 10.9 t 0.2 lb/g1 1.3 kg/L
Aluminum: 8.6 ± 0.2 lb/g1 1.0 kg/L
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the MSDS sheet before use.
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.
Contact your Sherwin-Williams representative for additional technical data and
instructions.
WARRANTY
The Sherwin-Williams Company warrants our products to be free of manufactur-
ing defects in accord with applicable Sherwin-Williams quality control procedures.
Liability for products proven defective, if any, is limited to replacement of the defec-
tive product or the refund of the purchase price paid for the defective product as
determined by Sherwin-Williams. NO OTHER WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE
OF ANY KIND IS MADE BY SHERWIN-WILLIAMS, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
STATUTORY, BY OPERATION OF LAW OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
www.sherwin-williams.com/protective
/COVE
THE
E•
�J� fLT
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS
Protective
Marine
Coatings
Revised: June 9, 2016
BOND-PLEX
WATERBASED ACRYLIC COATING
APPLICATION BULLETIN
B71-200 SERIES
1.27
SURFACE PREPARATIONS
Surface must be clean, dry, and in sound condition. Remove all
oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material to
ensure adequate adhesion.
Do not use hydrocarbon solvents for cleaning.
Pre -Finished Siding:
(Fluorocarbon, Silicone Polyester, and Polyester Polymers)
Remove oil, grease, dirt, oxides, and other contaminants from the
surface by cleaning per SSPC-SP1 or water blasting per NACE
Standard RP -01-72 (caution: excessive blasting pressure may
cause warping, use caution). Always check for compatibility of
the previously painted surface with the new coating by applying a
test patch of 2 - 3 square feet. Allow to dry thoroughly for 1 week
before checking adhesion.
Previously Painted Surfaces:
Remove oil, grease, dirt, oxides, and other contaminants from the
surface by cleaning per SSPC-SP1 or water blasting per NACE
Standard RP -01-72 (caution: excessive blasting pressure may
cause warping, use caution). Always check for compatibility of
the previously painted surface with the new coating by applying a
test patch of 2 - 3 square feet. Allow to dry thoroughly for 1 week
before checking adhesion.
Surface Preparation Standards
Condition of ISO 8501-1 Swedish Std.
Surface BS7078:A1 SIS055900 SSPC
White Metal Sa 3 Sa 3 SP 5
Near White Metal Sa 2.5 Sa 2.5 SP 10
Commercial Blast Sa 2 Sa 2 SP 6
Brush -Off Blast Sa 1 Sa 1 SP 7
Hand Tool Cleaning peed & Rusted C St 2 C St 2 SP 2
Power Tool Cleaning Rusted C St 3 C St 3 SP 3
Pitted & Rusted D St 3 D St 3 SP 3
NACE
1
2
3
4
APPLICATION CONDITIONS
Temperature:
Relative humidity:
50°F (10°C) minimum, 120°F (49°C)
maximum
(air, surface, and material)
At least 5°F (2.8°C) above dew point
85% maximum
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
The following is a guide. Changes in pressures and tip sizes may
be needed for proper spray characteristics. Always purge spray
equipment before use with listed reducer. Any reduction must be
compliant with existing VOC regulations and compatible with the
existing environmental and application conditions.
Reducer/Clean Up: Water
Airless Spray
Pressure 2400 psi
Hose 1/4" - 3/8" ID
Tip 017" - .019"
Filter 60 mesh
Reduction As needed up to 10% by volume
Conventional Spray
Gun Binks 95
Fluid Nozzle 66
Air Nozzle 63PB
Atomization Pressure 60 psi
Fluid Pressure 25 psi
Reduction As needed up to 10% by volume
Brush
Brush Nylon / Polyester
Reduction Not recommended
Roller
Cover 1/4" woven solvent resistant core
Reduction Not recommended
If specific application equipment is not listed above, equivalent
equipment may be substituted.
www.sherwin-williams.com/protective
continued on back
COVER
TRE
� EARTH ,
SHERWIN
WILLIAMS
Protective
Marine
Coatings
BOND-PLEX
WATERBASED ACRYLIC COATING
APPLICATION BULLETIN
B71-200 SERIES
1.27
APPLICATION PROCEDURES
Surface preparation must be completed as indicated.
Mixing Instructions: Mix paint thoroughly to a uniform consistency
with low speed power agitation prior to use.
Apply paint at the recommended film thickness and spreading
rate as indicated below:
Recommended Spreading Rate per coat:
Minimum Maximum
White & Colors
Wet mils (microns) 4.8 (120)
Dry mils (microns) 2.0 (50)
—Coverage sq ft/gal (m2/L) 164 (4.0)
Aluminum
Wet mils (microns) 5.0 (125)
Dry mils (microns) 2.0 (50)
—Coverage sq ft/gal (m2/L) 148 (3.6)
Theoretical coverage sq fugal 640 (15.7 )
(m2/L) @ 1 mil / 25 microns dft
NOTE: Brush or roll application may require multiple coats to
achieve maximum film thickness and uniformity of appearance.
10.0 (250)
4.0 (100)
329 (8.0)
11.0 (275)
4.0 (100)
296 (7.3)
Drying Schedule 5.0 mils wet 1125 microns;
@ 50°F/10°C @ 77°F/25°C @ 120°F/49°C
50% RH
1.5 hours 45 minutes 20 minutes
6 hours 4 hours 2 hours
8 hours 4 hours 2 hours
To touch:
To handle:
To recoat:
To cure: 14 days 7 days 5 days
Drying time is temperature, humidity, and film thickness dependent.
Application of coating above maximum or below minimum
recommended spreading rate may adversely affect coating
performance.
CLEAN UP INSTRUCTIONS
Clean spills and spatters immediately with soap and warm water.
Clean hands and tools immediately after use with soap and warm
water. After cleaning, flush spray equipment with Mineral Spirits
to prevent rusting of the equipment. Follow manufacturer's safety
recommendations when using Mineral Spirits.
DISCLAIMER
The information and recommendations set forth in this Product Data Sheet are
based upon tests conducted by or on behalf of The Sherwin-Williams Company.
Such information and recommendations set forth herein are subject to change and
pertain to the product offered at the time of publication. Consult your Sherwin-
Williams representative to obtain the most recent Product Data Information and
Application Bulletin.
PERFORMANCE TIPS
Stripe coat all crevices, welds, and sharp angles to prevent early
failure in these areas.
When using spray application, use a 50% overlap with each pass
of the gun to avoid holidays, bare areas, and pinholes. If necessary,
cross spray at a right angle
During the early stages of drying, the coating is sensitive to rain,
dew, high humidity, and moisture condensation. Plan painting
schedules to avoid these influences during the first 16-24 hours
of curing.
Spreading rates are calculated on volume solids and do not include
an application Toss factor due to surface profile, roughness or po-
rosity of the surface, skill and technique of the applicator, method
of application, various surface irregularities, material lost during
mixing, spillage, overthinning, climatic conditions, and excessive
film build.
Excessive reduction of material can affect film build, appearance,
and adhesion.
Do not use hydrocarbon solvents for cleaning. When clean-
ing the surface per SSPC-SP1, use only an emulsifying industrial
detergent, followed by a thorough water rinse.
Always check compatibility of the previously painted surface with
the new coating by applying a test patch of 2-3 square feet. Allow
to dry thoroughly for 1 week before checking adhesion.
Refer to Product Information sheet for additional performance
characteristics and properties.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the MSDS sheet before use.
Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.
Contact your Sherwin-Williams representative for additional technical data and
instructions.
WARRANTY
The Sherwin-Williams Company warrants our products to be free of manufacturing
defects in accord with applicable Sherwin-Williams quality control procedures.
Liability for products proven defective, if any, is limited to replacement of the de-
fective product or the refund of the purchase price paid for the defective product
as determined by Sherwin-Williams. NO OTHER WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE
OF ANY KIND IS MADE BY SHERWIN-WILLIAMS, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
STATUTORY, BY OPERATION OF LAW OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
www.sherwin-williams.com/protective
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1
CONTRACT 4
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 8
PROPOSAL/BID BOND 9
AFFIDAVIT 10
NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 11
PROPOSAL 12
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 14
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 155
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA
CERTIFICATION FORM 199
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST CERTIFICATION FORM.. 2020
SECTION V Page i Updated: 10/12/2018
PROSURE GROUP
BONDING TOGETHER . BUILDING TOGETHER
December 17, 2019
City of Clearwater
100 S. Myrtle Ave., Suite 220
Belleair, FL 33756
Contractor:
Project:
Bond #:
Amount:
Restocon Corporation
North Garden Parking Garage Restoration
41Koo80i4
$702,848.40
RE: Authorization to Date Bonds and Power Of Attorney
To Whom It May Concern:
7217 Benjamin Road
Tampa, FI... 33634.
t' (813)243-1110
0 (813) :243 -110 9 f
coniractbonds(
osuregroup.com
® www.prosuregroup.cam
We have executed the captioned bond(s) on behalf of Restocon Corporation in favor of the City of
Clearwater. Please note that we have not dated the bond(s) or the Power of Attorney. The copy of
the contract we received was not dated and as the bond(s) guarantee(s) the contract, they should not
be dated prior to the contract.
Please accept this letter as authorization to date the enclosed Performance and/or Payment bond(s),
as well as the attached Power of Attorney for the captioned project. Please date these items
concurrently with the contract date.
Please do not hesitate to contact our office should you have any questions in this regard. Thank you.
Sincerely,
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
•
David B. Shick
Attorney -In -Fact for Surety
Florida Resident Agent
SURETY BONDS
Performance Bonds I Contract Bonds I License Bonds I Court Bonds
PROSURE GROUP
BONDING TOGETHER . BUILDING TOGETHER
7217 Benjamin Road
Tampa, FL 33634
t' (813) 243-n10
[ (813) 243 -1109 fax
al contractbonds Ct prosure8roup.COfT1
• www.prosuregroup.com
This is the front page of the performance/payment bond
issued in compliance with Florida Statute Chapter 255.05
THE PROVISIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF SECTION 255.05 FLORIDA STATUTES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATIONS IN SECTIONS 255.05(2) AND 255.05(10), ARE INCORPORATED IN THIS
BOND BY REFERENCE
Bond Number:
Surety in which bond's written:
Local Address:
Local Phone Number:
Contractor/Principal Name:
Address:
Phone:
Owner of Property / Contracting Entity:
Address:
Phone:
Contract Number:
Project Name:
Project Address:
Project Description:
41K008024
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
9721 Executive Center Drive, Suite 105,
St. Petersburg, FL 33702
(727) 822-5610
Restocon Corporation
337 North Falkenburg Road,
Tampa, FL 33619
(813) 643-2202
City of Clearwater
100 5. Myrtle Ave., Suite 220
Belleair, FL 33756
(727) 562-4750
18-oo33-GN
North Garden Parking Garage Restoration
28 North Garden Ave., Clearwater, FL. 33755
Parking Garage Repairs
This bond has been furnished to comply with the requirements of F.S.A. 255.05. This bond is hereby amended
such that all provisions and limitations, including conditions, motive and time limitation of F.S.A. 255.05 are
incorporated herein by reference. Any provisions of this bond which conflicts with or purports to grant broader
or more expanded coverage in excess of the minimum requirements of the applicable statute shall be deemed
herefrom. This bond is a statutory bond, not a common law bond.
This is the front page of the bond regardless of preprinted numbers on the other pages issued in compliance
with F.S.A. 255.05
KEN BURKE, CLERK OF COURT
AND COMPTROLLER PINELLAS COUNTY, FL
INST# 2020007147 01/07/2020 11:10 AM
OFF REC BK: 20836 PG: 1999-2003
DocTYPe:BOND RECORDING: $44,00
SURETY BONDS
Performance Bonds I Contract Bunds I License Bonds I Court Bonds
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.: 41K008024
PUBLIC ONSTRUCTION BOND
(1)
This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under
this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections
(2) and (10).
Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the
work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy
of the recorded bon . Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt
payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the
contractor has complied with this paragraph."
CONTRACTOR SURETY
Restocon Corporation
337 N. Falkenburg Rd.
Tampa, FL 33619
813-643-2202
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
[name]
9721 Executive Center Drive
St,Pctersburg, FL 33702
(principal business ussj
(727) 822-5610
(phone number]
PROJECT NAME: North Garden Ave Garage
PROJECT NO.: 18 -0033 -EN
OWNER
City of Clearwater
Engineering
100 S. Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756
(727) 562-4747
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Concrete repair, removal and replacement of expansion joints, installation
of waterproofing membrane, removal and replacement of sealants, restoration of handrail systems, stucco
repair, metal wall framing repair, paint and sealing exterior facade/wall, and power washing an existing
parking structure.
BY THIS BOND, We, Restocon Corporation as Contractor, and
The Ohio Ca,ualty Insurance Company , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the
City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $ 702,848.40, for payment of which we
bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally.
THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor:
Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction
of North Garden Ave Garage (18 -0033 -EN), the contract documents being made a part of this bond
by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond,
Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and
such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the
times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and
SECTION V Page 1 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes,
supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in
the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and
SECTION V
Page 2 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.: 41K008024
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(2)
3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate
proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and
4, To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their
officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to,
reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional
wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the
performance of the construction contract; and
5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified
in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force.
6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the
notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes.
7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any
formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under
this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this
, 20_.
(If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required).
(If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal).
SECTION V
Restocon Co
By:
Title:
Print Name:
WITNESS:
day of
L�fA/
i2afa�'
Print Name:
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
(Corporate Surety)
fc,IAmo,
By:
ATTORNE -IN-FA»
CT„ e�',�
Print Name: David B. Shick, A r ir-Fallt=& I
Licensed FL Res�dent'tgent 4a:241114
.
(af/ix corporate seal) ' 0 ; •,��n
ik 7 ° `041/wl „'
(Power of Attorney must be attpcgvvcck, • • :
♦ b
?IBS 9k„t
ta!aee*"
Page 3 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Liberty
Mutual.
SURETY
This Power of Attorney timNs the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to
hind the Company except in the manner and to the extent heroin stated.
Liberty Mutual Insurance Company
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
West American Insurance Company
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that
Liberty Mutual kouramce Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Stale of Massachusetts, and Wast American Insurance Con :any is a corporation duly organized
under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein caredwiy cared the "Companies"), pursuant to and by authority herein set forth, does hereby nane, constitute and appoint, David B.
Shack; Brandy Batch
Certificate No: 8200633-969456
all of the city of Tama state of FL each individually t there be more than one named, its true and lawful attorney-in-fact to make,
execute, seal, acuotNedge and deliver, for and ah its behalf as surety and as its ad and deed, any and at undertakings, bards, recogruances and other surety obligations, in pursuance
of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and aimed by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper
persons.
N WITNESS WHEREOF, this Power of Attorney has been surbecnbed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed
thereto this 27th day of February , 2019 .
David M. Carey, Assistant Seaetary
State of PENNSYLVANIA
County of MONTGOMERY
On hs 27th day of Febtusty , 2019 before me persa*/ appeared David M. Carey, who adanowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary at Liberty Mutual Insurance
Company. The {Mao Casually Company, and West Mlerieau durance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do. execute the foregoing nsinrnet for the purposes
therein contained by signing on behaU of the corporations by henself as a duly authorized officer.
DI WITNESS WHEREOF, t have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my notarial seal at Kung a Prussia, Pennsylvania, on the day and year first above written.
LTN OF PENNBYLYANIA
Notenel Seal
Tense Pastele, Notary Public
r Merlon Up. Montgomery Conroy
Commission Expires Mann 28.2021
Pennsylvania M7WSWn or Notable
By:
eresa Pesters, Nor Public
This Power of Atbmey is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the 'Glowing By-laws and Authorizations of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual
Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in fur force and effect reading as follows:
ARTICLE IY — OFFICERS: Section 12. Power of Attomey.
My officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the
President may prescribe, shat appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, adcnowiedge and delver as surety
any and as undertakings, bonds, recognioances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -tat, sthed to the kmCabono set 1odh in their reapective powers of attorney, shag
have full power to bind the Corporation by their signadae and execution of any suds isstrtrnets and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such
instruments shat be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any poorer or authority granted to any represerilative or attorney-in-fact under the
provisions of this article may be revoked al any time by the Board, the Chainmen, the President a by the officer or officers granfig such power or authority_
ARTICLE MO — Execution of Contracts: Section 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings.
gs.
Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in wring by the chairman or the president, and subject to such limitations as the caiman or the president may presale,
shall appoint such attomeys-in-fad, as may be necessary to ad in behalf at the Company to male, execute, seal, adauowhedge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,
bonds, recognizances and other surety obligationsSuch attorneys -in -fact subject to the limitations set that in their respective powers of attorney, shall have hdl power to bind the
Company by that signature and execution of any such ihstr mems and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such fistiunents shag be as binning as if
signed by the president and attested by the secretory.
Certificate of Designation — The President of the Canpeny, acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company. authorizes [)avid M. Carey, Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys -in-
tact as may be necessary to ad on behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acuhowledge and delver as surety any and al undertakings, bonds, reoagrizances and other surety
obkgetions.
Authorization — By uhawmuws consent of the Compar fs Board of Diredcrs, the Company consents that tacsitnie or mechanically reproduced signature cif any assistant secretary of the
Company, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company m centection tet; surely bonds, stall be veld and binding upon the Cornpany with
the same force and effect as though manually affixed.
1, Renee C. Ltewetym, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, Thettttio' kas}rrance Company, liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do
hereby certify tat the ocigisal power of attorney of which the foreaojlgi� red copy of the Power of Attomey executed by said Carparas, is in full force and effect and
has not been revoked. �� . , . , • ,' ,
N TESTIMONY WIEREOF,1 have hereunto set my hand° ie*seals34 Cothpa<hies this
hesu,/
1991 n _ r/ t. 49""'*e.
Mar�w► D
�M * *� Renee G. Llawheryrm, Assisted Secretary
dayot
, 2019
LMS -12873 LMIC OCIC WAIL Multi Co 062818
SECTION V —Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(1)
This CONTRACT made and entered into this 01 J day of Qh1G, 2.0-10 by and between the City
of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter design 'ted as the "City", and Restocon
Corporation, of the City of Tampa, County of Hillsborough and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as
the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the
part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums
of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own
cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following:
PROJECT NAME: North Garden Ave Garage
PROJECT NO.: 18 -0033 -EN
in the amount of $ 702,848.40
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement,
instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract,
and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall
be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor,
then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the
right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the
provisions as contained herein.
SECTION V Page 4 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(2)
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE
TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT
AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT
OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS,
STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE
CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF
SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS
CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB
CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES
BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR
EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2).
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate
against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin.
The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading,
demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other
forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post
hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be
provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event
that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then
further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor
the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains
incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely
represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the
work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but
is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work
within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this
contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms
and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases
to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City.
If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions
of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work
under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it.
SECTION V Page 5 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(3)
In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement
agrees to comply with public records law.
IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF
CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC
RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC
RECORDS AT 727-562-4092, Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com,
112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756
The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency
with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a
reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida
Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law.
c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records
disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the
contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the
records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in
possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency
to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon
completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are
exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the
contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor
shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored
electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's
custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology
systems of the public agency.
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services
must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested
records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the
contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time.
f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the
public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in
accordance with the contract.
g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable
time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a
public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor
the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public
records request within a reasonable time; and
SECTION V Page 6 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(4)
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the
public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the
request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h12. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public
records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public
agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier
delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or
shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic
format.
A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice
is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
j)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have
executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
W ` , Load
By:
William B. Horne, II
City Manager Attest:
Countersigned:
By: ct Krk t t'ttV
George N. Cretekos,
Mayor
Contr or must indicate whether:
Corporation, Partnership,
osemarie Call
City Clerk
Assistant City Attorney
Company, or
NC.97tDGtivt CSV 2A'TI,1
Individual
(Contract
By:
Print Name:
Title: /.(4.1 P. klietti
(SEAL)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title;
where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the
Corporation — provide Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 7 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT
TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: North Garden Ave Garage
Engineering PROJECT NO.: 18 -0033 -EN
100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: [ 1
Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO. : [ 1, recorded in O.R. Book [ 1,
Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida.
CONTRACTOR: Restocon Corporation
Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between
the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the:
[insert name of Surety]
[address]
[address]
on bond of
Restocon Corporation
337 N Falkenburg Rd.
Tampa, FL 33619, CONTRACTOR,
,SURETY,
hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor
shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to
City of Clearwater
Engineering
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Clearwater, FL 33756
as set forth in said Surety's bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of
Attest:
(Seal):
,OWNER,
(Surety)
(Signature of authorized representative)
(Printed name and title)
SECTION V Page 8 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.: N/A
PROPOSAL/BID BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Restocon Corporation
as Contractor, and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
as Surety, whose address is 9721 Executive Center Dr., Suite 105
St. Petersburg, FL 33702 , are held and firmly bound unto the City
of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid in U.S. Dollars
($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which,
well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Restocon Corporation
as Contractor, and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company as Surety, for
work specified as: North Garden Parking Garage Renovation; Bid No.: 18 -0033 -GN
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and
specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the
above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract,
in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the
City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and
the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages.
Principal must indicate whether:
X Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual
Signed this 9th day of October , 20 19 .
Restocon C
Contr
r
PrincipalC/b,mA
By:
Title
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
Surety
D . Shhk, orney-t ►-Fa & Licensed FL
Res dent Agent #A241176
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title;
where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the
Corporation — provide Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 9 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SURETY SURETY
This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to
bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent henNn stated.
Liberty Mutual Insurance Company
The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
West American Insurance Company
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Certificate No: 8200633-969466
KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company is a corporation dry organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that
Liberty Mutual hsurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts. and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized
under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein coiecti ely caned the "Companies"j, pursuant to and by authority him set forth, does hereby name, constitute and appoint. David B.
Shirk; Brandy Batch
all of the city of Tampa state of FL each individually if there be more than one named. its true and lawful attorney-in-fact to make,
execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver, for and on its behalf as suety and as its ad and deed, any and al undertakings, bonds, recogrrzances and other surety obligations, in pursuance
of these presents and shall be as binding rani the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Canparies in their r own proper
persons
N WITNESS WHEREOF, the Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized (Akar or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed
thereto this 27th day of February , 2019 -
State of PENNSYLVANIA
County of MONTGOMERY ss
On this 27th day d February , 2019 before me pemsonaty appeared David M. Carey, who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of Liberty Mutual Insurance
Company, The Ohio Casualty Company, and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes
therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by henset as a duly authorized officer.
WN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my nave and affixed my notarial seal at King of Prussia, Pennsylvania, on the day and yew first above written.
COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA
Notsn:I Seal
Teresa Pastel's, Notary Pudic
Upper Merton Twp, Montgomery County
My Commission Expires Mori+ 28, 2021
Member. Pennsylvania Asanneiton Ot NdWne$
By
Ltdio„
Brew Pasha, Notary Public
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the blowing By-laws and Authorizations of The Ohio Casually Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual
Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in fit force and effect reading as foiows:
ARTICLE Il' — OFFICERS: Section 12. Power of Attorney.
Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chaimnat or the President, and subject to such lenntation as the Chairman or the
President may press rte, shat appott such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to ac in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and delver as surety
any and al undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective !Dwane of attorney, shat
have full power to bind the Corporation by their sipature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such
instruments shat be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any power or authority granted to any representative or attorney-in-fact under the
provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the C hairnn, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority.
ARTICLE XM — Execution of Centrads: Section 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings.
Any offer of the Company authorized for that purpose In wrung by the chairman or the president, aid subject to such lirnititions as the chaehnah or the president may prescribe,
shall appoint such attorneys -in -fad, as may be necessary fo act in behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings,
bonds, rerxgnizarnces and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the
Company by their signature and execution of any such insiunenb and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such instnments shag be as binding as if
sighted by the president and attested by the secretary_
Certificate of Designation — The President of the Company, acing pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company. authorizes David M. Carey, Assist ort Secretary to apooed such attorneys -in -
fad as may be necessary to ad an behalf of tie Company fo make, execute, seal, acknowledge and delver as suety any and all undertakings, bonds, recogrrzances and other surety
obligations.
Authorization — By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Diredors, the Company consents that facsimile or meow/ reproduced statue of any assistant secretary of the
Company, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in cnrnheclioh with surety bands, shall be valid and hexing upon the Company with
the same force and effect as though manually affixed.
I, Renee C. Llewellyn, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, The Ohio Casually Insurance Company. Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do
hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a iul:•true and carred ropy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and
has not been revoked.
N4TESTIMONY WIEREOF, l have hereunto set my hand scat atnxed the seas of said Companies this 9th day of
LMS -12873 LANG WAIC Multi Ca 062018
By:
October . 2019
tireolegst"...
Renee C. Llewellyn, Assistant Secretary
SECTION V — Contract Documents
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF Hillsborough )
Robert W. Howell , being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
Secretary of
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its
principal office at:
337 N. Falkenburg Road, Tampa Hillsborough FL
(Street & Number) (City) (County) (State)
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
Restocon Corporation
(Name of Corporation)
Affiant further says that Robert W. Howell is Chairman
(Officer's Name)
(Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for North Garden St. Garage
or said corporation by virtue of t220 of L w5
(state whether a provisio. o /by la or a Resolution of
Board of Directors. If ' es. . g ve ;; : of adoption).
Robert W. Howell
Affiant
�
I
Sworn to before me this / day of De i ' ei Q- , 20 / g .
SECTION V
Notary bli 4
Gae$
nt/stamp rine of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
Page 10 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF Hillsborough )
Robert W. Howell
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
6111-1 (7 -ht
of Restocon Corporation
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly,
with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and
has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or
conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit
or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of
Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; anthat all statements
contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder as not d rectly or indirectly
submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged informatio r �/ tive the e o to any association
or to any member or agent thereof. /_
Affiant
Sworn to and subscribed before me this lilday of .G-'127 Sea_
Notary blit/
SECTION V
,20.
Page 11 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
North Garden Ave Garage (18 -0033 -EN)
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
North Garden Ave Garage (18 -0033 -EN)
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the
City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a
certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or
without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent
documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged
with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement,
Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions,
Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation
as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the
Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto
annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the
work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according
to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the
required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at
its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be
null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the
property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City,
or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or
liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of
said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
SECTION V
Page 12 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V— Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(2)
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company
Bank, for the sum
Hundred Eighty -Four and 90/100 dollars
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
of Seventy Thousand Two
($ 70, 284.90
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name
of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements,
enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub -contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or
employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES:
Robert Howell
Michael Long
ADDRESSES:
337 N. Falkenburg Road, Tampa FL 33619
337 N. Falkenburg Road, Tampa FL 33619
Signature of Bidder:
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a co ..ration is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bint e corporation.
Principal: ' • " , o A II
By: ice' Title: Chairman
Company Legal Name: Restocon Corporation
Doing Business As (if different than above):
Business Address of Bidder: 337 N. Falkenburg Road, 33619
City and State: Tampa FL
Phone: 813-643-2202
Datcd at Tampa, FL
SECTION V
Zip Code 33619
Email Address: e.biomberg@restocon.com
, this 9 day if October , A.D., 2019.
Page 13 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT: North Garden Ave Garage (18 -0033 -EN)
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. 1
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
SECTION V
Date: 9-27-19
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Robert o , ell
(N
(Signature o • icer)
Chairman
(Title of Officer)
1-0-9-19
(Date)
Page 14 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
1
1
1
1
Bidder's Proposal
Project: 18 -0033 -EN North Garden Ave Parking Garage
Contractor: RESTOCON CORPORATION
Bidder's Grand Total (Numbers): $ 702,848.40
Bidder's Grand Total (Words): $ SEVEN HUNDRED TWO THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED FOTY-EIGHT AND 40/100 DOLALRS
I I I
N GARDEN AVENUE PARKING GARAGE (18 -0033 -EN)
Item #
BASE BID ITEMS
UNIT
QTY
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
1
Mobilization
LS
1
$ 2,500.00
$ 2,500.00
2
Concrete repair- Delaminated areas, spalls and exposed metal in vertical and
overhead surfaces.
CF
60
$ 425.00
$ 25,500.00
3
Concrete repair- Delaminated areas, spalls and exposed metal in horizontal
surfaces.
CF
25
$ 420.00
$ 10,500.00
4
Epoxy injection crack repair- Routing and installation of injection ports and
cap seal for epoxy injection; installation of epoxy for crack repair in vertical
and overhead surfaces.
LF
130
$ 55.00
$ 7,150.00
5
Horizontal top slab surface crack and slab on grade crack repair- Routing and
installation of urethane sealant for crack repair in horizontal slab/top
surfaces.
LF
1800
$ 5.50
$ 9,900.00
6
Clean and coat rust -stained, surface corroded shear connector bars at
locations throughout the parking garage; refer to detail 2/53.1.
EA
650
$ 36.50
$ 23,725.00
7
At damaged/broken shear connectors, remove and replace with new
reinforcing steel bar at locations shown on drawings. Refer to detail 1/53.1.
EA
8
$ 145.00
$ 1,160.00
8
Expansion Joint Repair- Remove and replace with new expansion joint in the
area shown on drawings. Work includes necessary surface preparation as per
manufacturer's surface preparation requirements, refer to drawing detail
3/53.1.
LS
1
$ 2,400.00
$ 2,400.00
9
Heavy -Duty Traffic Grade Waterproofing Membrane - Refer to Specification
07185: Installation of waterproof deck membrane at existing coated locations
(refer to drawings/plan sheets 52.1 and 52.3). Work includes necessary
surface preparation to accept waterproofing membrane as per
manufacturer's surface preparation requirements. Work includes all cant
beads at slab transitions and membrane shall extend over cant beads.
LS
1
$ 157,111.00
$ 157,111.00
1
1
1
1
Bidder's Proposal
Project: 18 -0033 -EN North Garden Ave Parking Garage
Contractor: RESTOCON CORPORATION
Bidder's Grand Total (Numbers): $ 702,848.40
Bidder's Grand Total (Words): $ SEVEN HUNDRED TWO THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED FOTY-EIGHT AND 40/100 DOLALRS
I I I I
N GARDEN AVENUE PARKING GARAGE (18 -0033 -EN)
Item #
BASE BID ITEMS
`
UNIT
QTY
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
10
Remove and replace all existing sealants throughout the parking garage,
including but not necessarily limited to interface between:
"Control Joints
*Topping Slab and Sidewalk
'Top concrete
*Sidewalks and pre -cast concrete wall panels
"Sidewalks and concrete columns *Concrete
stair system and concrete walls
•General - interfaces of concrete elements *Window
frame to wall surface at the northeast elevator enclosure
*Top of slab surface and vertical surfaces
"Exterior wall panel and column
*Exterior wall panel and panel
'Handrail post base perimeters
*Installation of any absent horizontal to vertical concrete surface interface
sealants
LS
1
$ 93,000.00
$ 93,000.00
11
Handrail Post Base Repairs - Excavate existing unsound concrete to expose
corroding metal handrail post base. Clean metal surfaces of corrosion, coat
metal and concrete areas with bonding agent and anti -corrosion coating.
Replace excavation with new concrete material. Refer to detail 5/53.2.
EA
25
$ 135.00
$ 3,375.00
12
Fill interior of posts with grout at all handrail posts; refer to Specification
03720 and drawing detail 6/53.2.
LS
1
$ 2,300.00
$ 2,300.00
13
Handrail Post Base Repairs - When section loss at post base is encountered,
repair via splicing new pipe segment; refer to detail 4/S3.2.
EA
10
$ 225.00
$ 2,250.00
14
Paint Metal Handrail Systems - Remove existing paint coating from all
exterior exposed surfaces and any surface corrosion via sandblasting. Paint
metal handrail systems. Refer to specification 09900.
LS
1
$ 13,500.00
$ 13,500.00
15
Stucco Repair - Remove and replace existing corner beads at the front arched
facade framing and exterior columns along the east elevation via the
following:
'Remove existing stucco finish to expose existing corner beads *Remove
existing metal corner beads and replace with PVC corner beads as shwon in
drawing details 1 and 2/53.2. *Replace
stucco finish at afftected areas
LS
1
$ 5,500.00
$ 5,500.00
16
Stucco Repair - Remove and replace any damaged/delaminated/failing stucco
along the east elevation of the parking garage. Refer to Specification 09221.
SF
700
$ 25.00
$ 17,500.00
17
Remove and replace all stucco finish system along the east elevation,
including all necessary accessories and include use of corrosion resistant
accessories. Refer to Specification 09221.
LS
1
$ 133,900.00
$ 133,900.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bidder's Proposal
Project: 18 -0033 -EN North Garden Ave Parking Garage
Contractor: RESTOCON CORPORATION
Bidder's Grand Total (Numbers): $ 702,848.40
Bidder's Grand Total (Words): $ SEVEN HUNDRED TWO THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED FOTY-EIGHT AND 40/100 DOLALRS
I I I I
N GARDEN AVENUE PARKING GARAGE (18 -0033 -EN)
Item #
BASE BID ITEMS
UNIT
QTY
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
18
Stucco Repair- Remove and replace any damaged/delaminated/failing stucco
throughout the remainder of the parking garage. Refer to Specification 09221
SF
200
$ 35.00
$ 7,000.00
19
Paint Exterior Wall Surfaces and Facade — existing painted surfaces at the
front (east) elevation (including front columns, planter walls, office half walls
and arched facade) and exterior surfaces of stair and elevator towers. Refer
to specification 09900.
LS
1
$ 14,267.00
$ 14,267.00
20
Clean and seal exterior vertical concrete surfaces with a vertical surface
water repellent. Refer to specification 07190.
LS
1
$ 14,119.00
$ 14,119.00
21
Power wash before construction and after restoration is complete throughout
the parking garage at all horizontal and interior vertical concrete surfaces.
LS
1
$ 27,000.00
$ 27,000.00
22
Installation of Concrete overlay/topping material for topping slab
SF
100
$ 35.50
$ 3,550.00
23
Exterior Metal Framing Repair- At areas of stucco removal and replacement,
when corroding metal framing is encountered, metal framing is to be cleaned
and primed
SF
200
$ 17.00
$ 3,400.00
24
Exterior Metal Framing Repair- At areas of stucco removal and replacement,
when corroding metal framing is encountered, metal framing is to be
repaired or replaced
SF
100
$ 51.00
$ 5,100.00
SUBTOTAL
$ 585,707.00
25
20% CONTINGENCY
LS
1
$ 117,141.40
$ 117,141.40
TOTAL CONTRACT
02,848.40
SECTION V — Contract Documents
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH
SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS.
THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM
PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE
CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF A CURRENT CONTRACTOR
LICENSE/REGISTRATION WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND PINELLAS COUNTY IN
THE BID RESPONSE.
SECTION V
Page 18 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE
COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL, FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS
FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements
of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities
in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or
engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business
operations in Cuba and Syria; and
3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce
in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning,
selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and
4. if awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writi, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scruti ed Co anies with Activities in
Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities ' tro m E ector List, or engages in
business operations in Cuba and Syria.
STATE OF Florida
COUNTY OF Hillsborough
Authorized Signature
Robert W. Howell
Printed Name
Chairman
Title
Restocon Corporation
Name of Entity/Corporation
The foregoinginstrument was acknowledged before me on this a day of ()cipher ,
Ft
20 , by
r�,tli (name of person whose signature is being notarized)
as the Chair ma n (title) of Resrcon corioora. or► (name of
corporation/entity), pegs cknown t l jpe as described herein , or produced a
(type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath.
Notary ublic
Fxl4 Che,l s
Printed/Name
My Commission Expires: 3 -L J 2O2I
NOTARY SEAL ABOVE
SECTION V
Page 19 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST
CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH
THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR
SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements
of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott
Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a
boycott of Israel; and
3. "Boycott Israel" or "boycott of Israel" means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking
other actions to limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or
in Israeli -controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is
participating in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott
of Israel or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as
evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel; and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individu.I, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwate in wri g, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the ed Co • . nies that Boycott Israel
List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel.
STATE OF Florida
COUNTY OF Hillsborough
Authorized S gnature
Robert W. Howell
Printed Name
Chairman
Title
Restocon Corporation
Name of Entity/Corporation
The foregoinit instrument was acknowledged before me on this l day of Ctither
20 IQ , by Koberi' jiawel1 (name of person whose signature is being notarized)
as the (,ha i r• ma n (title) of Res-bcoh (Omura 4i'vn (name of
corporation/entity), penally known to me as describe herein r , or produced a
(type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath.
My Commission Expires: 3 , 1 - 2.b2
NOTARY SEAL ABOVE
CP.
Nota Public
Fa Li Claeys'
Printed NIAme
SECTION V Page 20 of 20 Updated: 10/12/2018
I-CGC057948
HoweU, Robert W
337 N. Falkenburg Road
Tampa, FL 33619
I-CGC1504586
Long, Michael Shane
337 Falkenburg Road N
Tampa, FL 33619
4006 PINEILAS COUNTY CONSTRUCTION
LICBNSINO BOARD
THIS CERTIFIES THAT Robert W Howell H
DBA Reelowo Corp
STATE CERT * I-CGCOS7PI11
HAS FILED HIS/HER LICENSE AND PROOF OF REQUIRED
LIABILITY AND WORKERS' COMPENSATION
INSURANCE WITH TMIS BOARD.
IN GOOD STANDING UNTIL September 30, 2020
DATE OF ISSUANCE 06I17M0
* Please cut out Ukeebe along lines
re PINE LAS COUNTY CONSTRUCTION
WCE!ISING BOARD
THIS CERTWIES THAT Mieiael Same Long
DBA Redeem Corporation
STATE CERT* IC CI50W6
HAS PILED HIS/HER LICENSE AND PROOF OF REQUIRED
LIABILITY AND WORKERS' COMPENSATION
INSURANCE WITH THIS BOARD.
IN GOOD STANDING 1NTIL September 30.2020
DATE OF ISSUANCE 06/17/2019
* Please cut out lkes,ee along lines
1
Ron DeSantis, Governor Halsey Beshears, Secretary
, t4,
,..,.
.,:., db»r
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION
CONSTRUCTIO �.. 0. LENSING BOARD
rye' , •��
THE GENERAL Ct` '+
��,.._ ,- ,, ,ED UNDER THE
eil-
PROVISI •-' * `.'::-• ,r,', ' 'a' R•' ,. 7 `' TUTES
j+
•
�• _
11
•
� �„
f t w it A •= cirr iIM � . 1
‘I " 66 ' .2 • , 'A" I P it' il
••
',. •
i
.
.-1,7,--it::;
'
EXPIRATION DATE: AUGUST 31, 2020
Always verify licenses online at MyFloridaLicense.com
Do not alter this document in any form.
This is your license. It is unlawful for anyone other than the licensee to use this document.